Commissioning Manual Generator Protection REG670 2.1 IEC

—
R E L I O N ® 670 SERIES
Generator protection REG670

Version 2.1 IEC
Commissioning manual
Document ID: 1MRK 502 067-UEN
Issued: March 2019
Revision: B
Product version: 2.1
© Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may
be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/
developed by: Eric Young ([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that
each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or
other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where
a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons
(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to
ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled
out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.
Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or
liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the
equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests
conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive,
and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The
product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction....................................................................................................... 11
1.1 This manual........................................................................................................................................11
1.2 Intended audience............................................................................................................................ 11
1.3 Product documentation..................................................................................................................12
1.3.1 Product documentation set.......................................................................................................12
1.3.2 Document revision history......................................................................................................... 13
1.3.3 Related documents......................................................................................................................13
1.4 Document symbols and conventions...........................................................................................14
1.4.1 Symbols......................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4.2 Document conventions...............................................................................................................15
1.5 IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping...................................................................................... 15
Section 2 Safety information........................................................................................... 23

2.1 Symbols on the product................................................................................................................. 23
2.2 Warnings............................................................................................................................................ 23
2.3 Caution signs.................................................................................................................................... 24
2.4 Note signs..........................................................................................................................................25
Section 3 Available functions........................................................................................... 27

3.1 Main protection functions..............................................................................................................27
3.2 Back-up protection functions....................................................................................................... 28
3.3 Control and monitoring functions............................................................................................... 30
3.4 Communication................................................................................................................................35
3.5 Basic IED functions.......................................................................................................................... 37
Section 4 Starting up.........................................................................................................39

4.1 Factory and site acceptance testing............................................................................................39
4.2 Commissioning checklist............................................................................................................... 39
4.3 Checking the power supply........................................................................................................... 40
4.4 Energizing the IED........................................................................................................................... 40
4.4.1 Checking the IED operation...................................................................................................... 40
4.4.2 IED start-up sequence................................................................................................................40
4.5 Energizing REX060...........................................................................................................................41
4.5.1 REX060 start up sequence.........................................................................................................41
4.6 Setting up communication between PCM600 and the IED..................................................... 41
4.7 Writing an application configuration to the IED....................................................................... 46
4.8 Checking CT circuits........................................................................................................................46
4.9 Checking VT circuits........................................................................................................................ 47
4.10 Using the RTXP test switch............................................................................................................47
4.11 Checking the binary I/O circuits...................................................................................................48
4.11.1 Binary input circuits....................................................................................................................48
4.11.2 Binary output circuits................................................................................................................. 48
1
Table of contents
4.12 Checking optical connections....................................................................................................... 48
Section 5 Configuring the IED and changing settings..................................................49

5.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 49
5.2 Configuring analog CT inputs....................................................................................................... 49
5.3 Reconfiguring the IED.....................................................................................................................50
Section 6 Calibrating injection based sensitive rotor earth fault protection........... 51

6.1 Commissioning process................................................................................................................. 51
6.2 Commissioning tool ICT................................................................................................................. 51
6.3 Launching injection commissioning tool (ICT) and performing the installation................53
6.4 Performing calibration....................................................................................................................54
6.5 Acquiring references....................................................................................................................... 57
6.6 Verifying calibration........................................................................................................................ 58
6.7 Auditing............................................................................................................................................. 60
6.8 Editing features in graph................................................................................................................61
6.9 Logging measurements to file...................................................................................................... 62
Section 7 Calibrating injection based 100% stator earth fault protection............... 63

7.1 Commissioning process.................................................................................................................63
7.2 Commissioning tool ICT................................................................................................................. 63
7.3 Launching injection commissioning tool (ICT) and performing the installation............... 65
7.4 Performing calibration................................................................................................................... 66
7.5 Acquiring references....................................................................................................................... 69
7.6 Verifying calibration........................................................................................................................ 70
7.7 Auditing..............................................................................................................................................72
7.8 Editing features in graph................................................................................................................73
7.9 Logging measurements to file...................................................................................................... 74
Section 8 Establishing connection and verifying the SPA/IEC communication........75

8.1 Entering settings............................................................................................................................. 75
8.1.1 Entering SPA settings................................................................................................................. 75
8.1.2 Entering IEC settings.................................................................................................................. 75
8.2 Verifying the communication........................................................................................................ 76
8.2.1 Verifying SPA communication...................................................................................................76
8.2.2 Verifying IEC communication....................................................................................................76
8.3 fiber optic loop................................................................................................................................. 76
8.4 Optical budget calculation for serial communication with SPA/IEC ....................................77
Section 9 Establishing connection and verifying the LON communication............... 79

9.1 Communication via the rear ports ...............................................................................................79
9.1.1 LON communication................................................................................................................... 79
9.1.2 The LON Protocol........................................................................................................................ 80
9.1.3 Hardware and software modules............................................................................................ 80
9.2 Optical budget calculation for serial communication with LON ...........................................82
Section 10 Establishing connection and verifying the IEC 61850 communication..... 83

10.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 83
2
Table of contents
10.2 Setting the station communication.............................................................................................83

10.3 Verifying the communication........................................................................................................84
Section 11 Testing IED operation...................................................................................... 85

11.1 Preparing for test............................................................................................................................ 85
11.1.1 Requirements............................................................................................................................... 85
11.1.2 Preparing the IED to verify settings........................................................................................ 86
11.2 Activating the test mode................................................................................................................87
11.3 Preparing the connection to the test equipment......................................................................87
11.4 Connecting the test equipment to the IED................................................................................ 88
11.5 Releasing the function to be tested............................................................................................ 88
11.6 Verifying analog primary and secondary measurement..........................................................89
11.7 Testing the protection functionality........................................................................................... 89
11.8 Forcing of binary I/O signals for testing.................................................................................... 90
11.8.1 Forcing concept...........................................................................................................................90
11.8.2 How to enable forcing................................................................................................................90
11.8.2.1 Enable forcing by using LHMI................................................................................................90
11.8.2.2 Enable forcing using TESTMODE function block............................................................... 91
11.8.3 How to change binary input/output signals using forcing................................................ 91
11.8.3.1 Forcing by using LHMI............................................................................................................. 91
11.8.3.2 Forcing by using PCM600.......................................................................................................92
11.8.4 How to undo forcing changes and return the IED to normal operation.......................... 94
11.8.4.1 Undo forcing by using TestMode component................................................................... 94
11.8.4.2 Undo forcing by using LHMI.................................................................................................. 94
11.8.4.3 Undo forcing by using PCM600............................................................................................ 94
Section 12 Testing functionality by secondary injection............................................... 97

12.1 Testing disturbance report............................................................................................................97
12.1.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................97
12.1.2 Disturbance report settings......................................................................................................97
12.1.3 Disturbance recorder (DR)......................................................................................................... 97
12.1.4 Event recorder (ER) and Event list (EL)................................................................................... 98
12.2 Identifying the function to test in the technical reference manual ......................................98
12.3 Differential protection....................................................................................................................98
12.3.1 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF............................................. 98
12.3.1.1 Verifying the settings..............................................................................................................99
12.3.1.2 Completing the test................................................................................................................ 99
12.3.2 High impedance differential protection HZPDIF ................................................................. 99
12.3.2.1 Verifying the settings..............................................................................................................99
12.3.2.2 Completing the test.............................................................................................................. 100
12.3.3 Generator differential protection GENPDIF ........................................................................100
12.3.3.1 Verifying the settings............................................................................................................100
12.3.3.2 Completing the test............................................................................................................... 101
12.3.4 Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF ............................................ 101
12.3.4.1 Verifying the settings............................................................................................................ 101
12.3.4.2 Completing the test...............................................................................................................102
12.4 Impedance protection...................................................................................................................102
3
Table of contents
12.4.1 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS.................................102

12.4.1.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values.....................................................................105
12.4.1.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones....................................... 105
12.4.2 Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS .....106
12.4.2.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values.....................................................................108
12.4.3 Full scheme distance protection, mho characteristic ZMHPDIS..................................... 109
12.4.3.1 Phase-to-phase faults............................................................................................................110
12.4.3.2 Phase-to-earth faults.............................................................................................................110
12.4.4 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS .....................................111
12.4.5 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings
ZMRPDIS....................................................................................................................................... 111
12.4.5.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values..................................................................... 114
12.4.5.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones........................................115
12.4.6 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS................ 115
12.4.6.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values......................................................................117
12.4.7 High speed distance protection zones, quadrilateral and mho characteristic
ZMFPDIS.......................................................................................................................................118
12.4.7.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values......................................................................121
12.4.7.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones........................................121
12.4.8 High Speed distance for series compensated line zones, quadrilateral and mho
characteristic ZMFCPDIS .........................................................................................................122
12.4.8.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values..................................................................... 125
12.4.8.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones....................................... 125
12.4.9 Power swing detection ZMRPSB ............................................................................................126
12.4.9.2 Testing the power swing detection function ZMRPSB ..................................................128
12.4.9.3 Testing the tR1 timer............................................................................................................. 128
12.4.9.4 Testing the block input, interaction between FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS
and ZMRPSB ............................................................................................................................128
12.4.10 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM.................................................................................................129
12.4.11 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM......................................................................................... 131
12.4.11.2 Test of point RE (RFwdR, XFwdX)............................................................................................ 135
12.4.11.3 Test of the boundary between zone 1 and zone 2, which is defined by the
parameter ReachZ1................................................................................................................ 139
12.4.11.4 Test of the point SE (RRvsR, XRvsX)........................................................................................142
12.4.12 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF....................................................................... 146
12.4.12.1 Activating ZCVPSOF externally............................................................................................147
12.4.12.2 Initiating ZCVPSOF automatically and setting mode to impedance...........................147
4
Table of contents
12.4.12.3 Initiating ZCVPSOF automatically and setting mode to UILevel ................................. 147
12.4.13 Loss of excitation LEXPDIS ..................................................................................................... 147
12.4.14 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ ............................................................................................149
12.4.15 Under impedance protection for Generator ZGVPDIS.......................................................150
12.4.16 Rotor earth fault protection with RXTTE4 and general current and voltage
protection CVGAPC................................................................................................................... 152
12.4.16.1 Testing......................................................................................................................................153
12.5 Current protection.........................................................................................................................154
12.5.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output PHPIOC ........................ 154
12.5.1.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values.........................................................................154
12.5.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output OC4PTOC.............................. 155
12.5.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC .................................................. 156
12.5.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or negative sequence
directionality) EF4PTOC .......................................................................................................... 156
12.5.4.1 Four step directional earth fault protection.....................................................................156
12.5.4.2 Four step non-directional earth fault protection.............................................................157
12.5.5 Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC ....................................157
12.5.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE ................158
12.5.6.1 Measuring the operate and time limit for set values......................................................159
12.5.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/Fahrenheit
LCPTTR/LFPTTR.........................................................................................................................163
12.5.7.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values....................................................... 163
12.5.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR .............................................163
12.5.8.1 Checking operate and reset values.....................................................................................163
12.5.9 Breaker failure protection, phase segregated activation and output CCRBRF............164
12.5.9.1 Checking the phase current operate value, IP>................................................................165
12.5.9.2 Checking the residual (earth fault) current operate value IN> set below IP>............ 165
12.5.9.3 Checking the re-trip and back-up times............................................................................ 165
12.5.9.4 Verifying the re-trip mode.................................................................................................... 165
12.5.9.5 Verifying the back-up trip mode......................................................................................... 166
5
Table of contents
12.5.9.6 Verifying instantaneous back-up trip at CB faulty condition........................................167

12.5.9.7 Verifying the case RetripMode = Contact..........................................................................167
12.5.9.8 Verifying the function mode Current&Contact................................................................ 167
12.5.10 Breaker failure protection, single phase version CCSRBRF ............................................. 168
12.5.10.1 Checking the phase current operate value IP>.................................................................169
12.5.10.2 Checking the re-trip and back-up times............................................................................169
12.5.10.3 Verifying the re-trip mode....................................................................................................169
12.5.10.4 Verifying the back-up trip mode......................................................................................... 170
12.5.10.5 Verifying instantaneous back-up trip at “CB faulty” condition ....................................170
12.5.10.6 Verifying the case FunctionMode = Contact.................................................................... 170
12.5.10.7 Verifying the function mode Curr&Cont Check................................................................ 171
12.5.11 Stub protection STBPTOC........................................................................................................ 171
12.5.11.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values......................................................................... 172
12.5.12 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC................................................................................... 172
12.5.13 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP ................................................................... 173
12.5.14 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ..................................................................... 175
12.5.15 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ....................................................................................... 175
12.5.15.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values........................................................175
12.5.16 Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC ................... 176
12.5.16.1 Verifying settings by secondary injection......................................................................... 176
12.5.17 Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator AEGPVOC...................... 178
12.5.18 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC................................................ 178
12.5.19 Generator stator overload protection GSPTTR................................................................... 181
12.5.20 Generator rotor overload protection GRPTTR..................................................................... 182
12.6 Voltage protection.........................................................................................................................183
12.6.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ..................................................................... 183
6
Table of contents
12.6.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ....................................................................... 184

12.6.2.2 Extended testing.................................................................................................................... 185
12.6.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ..................................................... 185
12.6.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ....................................................................................186
12.6.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ...........................................................................186
12.6.5.1 Check of undervoltage levels............................................................................................... 187
12.6.5.2 Check of voltage differential trip and alarm levels......................................................... 188
12.6.5.3 Check of trip and trip reset timers..................................................................................... 189
12.6.5.4 Final adjustment of compensation for VT ratio differences ........................................190
12.6.6 100% Stator earth fault protection, 3rd harmonic based STEFPHIZ .............................190
12.6.6.1 Testing..................................................................................................................................... 190
12.6.6.2 Verifying settings................................................................................................................... 191
12.6.7 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ............................................................................................ 192
12.7 Frequency protection....................................................................................................................193
12.7.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF .....................................................................................193
12.7.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF .......................................................................................194
12.7.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .................................................................. 195
12.7.4 Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR..........................................195
12.8 Multipurpose protection.............................................................................................................. 197
12.8.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................................................197
12.8.1.1 Built-in overcurrent feature (non-directional).................................................................. 197
12.8.1.2 Overcurrent feature with current restraint.......................................................................198
12.8.1.3 Overcurrent feature with voltage restraint...................................................................... 198
12.8.1.4 Overcurrent feature with directionality.............................................................................198
12.8.1.5 Over/Undervoltage feature................................................................................................. 199
12.9 Secondary system supervision....................................................................................................199
12.9.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC....................................................................................199
7
Table of contents

12.9.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.........................................................................................200
12.9.2.1 Checking that the binary inputs and outputs operate as expected .......................... 200
12.9.2.2 Measuring the operate value for the negative sequence function ............................. 201
12.9.2.3 Measuring the operate value for the zero-sequence function ..................................... 201
12.9.2.4 Measuring the operate value for the dead line detection function............................. 202
12.9.2.5 Checking the operation of the du/dt and di/dt based function ................................ 202
12.9.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC........................................................................................... 203
12.10 Control............................................................................................................................................. 204
12.10.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN....................................... 204
12.10.1.1 Testing the synchronizing function................................................................................... 205
12.10.1.2 Testing the synchrocheck check.........................................................................................206
12.10.1.3 Testing the energizing check.............................................................................................. 208
12.10.1.4 Testing the voltage selection.............................................................................................. 209
12.10.2 Apparatus control APC..............................................................................................................211
12.10.3 Tap changer control and supervision TCMYLTC, TCLYLTC............................................... 211
12.10.3.1 Secondary test........................................................................................................................ 213
12.10.3.2 Check the activation of the voltage control operation...................................................213
12.10.3.3 Check the normal voltage regulation function.................................................................214
12.10.3.4 Check the undervoltage block function............................................................................. 214
12.10.3.5 Check the upper and lower busbar voltage limit............................................................. 215
12.10.3.6 Check the overcurrent block function................................................................................ 215
12.10.3.7 Single transformer................................................................................................................. 215
12.10.3.8 Parallel voltage regulation.................................................................................................... 216
12.10.4 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.............................................................................220
12.10.5 Interlocking.................................................................................................................................220
12.11 Logic................................................................................................................................................. 220
12.11.1 Tripping logic, common 3-phase output SMPPTRC .......................................................... 220
12.11.1.1 Three-phase operating mode..............................................................................................220
12.11.1.2 1ph/3ph operating mode......................................................................................................221
12.11.1.3 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.............................................................................................221
12.11.1.4 Circuit breaker lockout..........................................................................................................222
12.11.2 Integrator TIGAPC..................................................................................................................... 223
12.12 Monitoring.......................................................................................................................................223
12.12.1 Gas medium supervision SSIMG............................................................................................. 223
12.12.1.1 Testing the liquid medium supervision for alarm and lock out conditions............... 223
12.12.2 Liquid medium supervision SSIML.........................................................................................224
12.12.2.1 Testing the liquid medium supervision for alarm and lock out conditions............... 224
8
Table of contents

12.12.3 Breaker monitoring SSCBR......................................................................................................224
12.12.4 Event function EVENT...............................................................................................................226
12.12.5 Limit counter L4UFCNT............................................................................................................226
12.13 Metering...........................................................................................................................................227
12.13.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT....................................................................................................227
12.13.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR..................................227
12.14 Station communication................................................................................................................ 228
12.14.1 Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV / MULTICMDSND.............................. 228
12.15 Remote communication............................................................................................................... 229
12.15.1 Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive, BinSignTransm.....................................................229
12.16 Basic IED functions........................................................................................................................230
12.16.1 Parameter setting group handling SETGRPS...................................................................... 230
12.17 Exit test mode.................................................................................................................................231
Section 13 Checking the directionality........................................................................... 233

13.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 233
13.2 Testing the directionality of the distance protection............................................................ 233
Section 14 Commissioning and maintenance of the fault clearing system............... 235

14.1 Commissioning tests.................................................................................................................... 235
14.2 Periodic maintenance tests......................................................................................................... 235
14.2.1 Visual inspection....................................................................................................................... 236
14.2.2 Maintenance tests.....................................................................................................................236
14.2.2.1 Preparation..............................................................................................................................236
14.2.2.2 Recording.................................................................................................................................236
14.2.2.3 Secondary injection............................................................................................................... 236
14.2.2.4 Alarm test.................................................................................................................................237
14.2.2.5 Self supervision check........................................................................................................... 237
14.2.2.6 Trip circuit check.................................................................................................................... 237
14.2.2.7 Measurement of service currents....................................................................................... 237
14.2.2.8 Restoring................................................................................................................................. 238
Section 15 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 239

15.1 Checking the self supervision signals....................................................................................... 239
15.1.1 Checking the self supervision function.................................................................................239
15.1.1.1 Determine the cause of an internal failure........................................................................239
15.1.2 Self supervision HMI data........................................................................................................ 239
15.1.2.1 General IED status..................................................................................................................239
15.2 Fault tracing................................................................................................................................... 240
9
Table of contents
15.2.1 Internal fault indications......................................................................................................... 240

15.2.2 Using front-connected PC....................................................................................................... 241
15.2.3 Diagnosing the IED status via the LHMI hint menu............................................................242
15.2.4 Hardware re-configuration..................................................................................................... 244
15.3 Repair instruction.......................................................................................................................... 245
15.4 Repair support............................................................................................................................... 246
15.5 Maintenance................................................................................................................................... 246
Section 16 Glossary........................................................................................................... 247
10
1MRK 502 067-UEN B Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v19
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual
can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the
testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and
energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by
secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which
is not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should
be commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service and
maintenance activities.
1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v10
This manual addresses the personnel responsible for commissioning, maintenance and taking
the IED in and out of normal service.
The commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge of handling electronic equipment.
The commissioning and maintenance personnel must be well experienced in using protection
equipment, test equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the
IED.
11
Section 1 1MRK 502 067-UEN B
Introduction
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v15
Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase
Decommissioning
Commissioning
Maintenance
Engineering
Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN-US
Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various
tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set
up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a
sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as
communication engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3, LON and SPA.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual
can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the
testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and
energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by
secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which
is not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should
be commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service and
maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of
the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated
and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.
12
Introduction
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by

the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the
IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication
protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security
when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access control,
and product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by
function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v2.1.1
Document revision/date History

January 2016 First Release
March 2019 Maintenance Release
1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v4
Documents related to REG670 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 502 065-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 502 067-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 502 068-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 502 066-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 502 068-TEN
670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 123-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 355-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 024-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 348-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 351-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 1MRK 511 349-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 350-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 352-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 353-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 354-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Table continues on next page
13
Introduction
670 series manuals Document numbers

Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 356-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
1.4 Document symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v12
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.
The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning about
the temperature of product surfaces.
Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do not
view directly with optical instruments.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which
could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or
how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.
14
Introduction
1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v8
• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary
also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button
icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a
valid application configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in millimeters.
1.5 IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v2
Table 1: IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM ALTIM
ALTMS ALTMS
ALTRK ALTRK
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
15
Introduction

BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
16
Introduction

CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
17
Introduction

GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOOSEBINRCV BINGREC
GOOSEDPRCV DPGREC
GOOSEINTLKRCV INTGREC
GOOSEINTRCV INTSGREC
GOOSEMVRCV MVGREC
GOOSESPRCV BINSGREC
GOOSEVCTRRCV VCTRGREC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
18
Introduction

LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
19
Introduction

SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
20
Introduction

U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC
21
22
Safety information
Section 2 Safety information
2.1 Symbols on the product GUID-E48F2EC3-6AB8-4ECF-A77E-F16CE45CA5FD v2
All warnings must be observed.
Read the entire manual before doing installation or any maintenance work on
the product. All warnings must be observed.
Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect your eyes and do not
view directly with optical instruments.
Do not touch the unit in operation. The installation shall take into account the
worst case temperature.
2.2 Warnings IP1504-1 v2
Observe the warnings during all types of work related to the product.
GUID-C9B6638A-57E7-4E05-9A33-A60E359C54AF v1
Only electrically skilled persons with the proper authorization and knowledge of
any safety hazards are allowed to carry out the electrical installation.
M2366-2 v2
National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed.

Working in a high voltage environment requires serious approach to avoid
human injuries and damage to equipment.
M2362-2 v1
Do not touch circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal voltages and currents
are present.
M2364-2 v1
Always use suitable isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry.
Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present.
23
Safety information
M2370-2 v1
Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a IED during

normal operation. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be
lethal. Operation may be disrupted and IED and measuring circuitry may be
damaged.
GUID-BEDD698E-356C-4CF9-9DAE-64DB3CEADEAD v1
Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the auxiliary
voltage has been disconnected.
M2369-2 v3
Always connect the IED to protective earth, regardless of the operating

conditions. This also applies to special occasions such as bench testing,
demonstrations and off-site configuration. This is class 1 equipment that shall
be earthed.
M2367-2 v1
Never disconnect the secondary connection of current transformer circuit

without short-circuiting the transformer’s secondary winding. Operating a
current transformer with the secondary winding open will cause a massive
potential build-up that may damage the transformer and may cause injuries to
humans.
M2372-2 v1
Never remove any screw from a powered IED or from a IED connected to
powered circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present.
SEMOD168311-3 v1
Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look into the laser beam.
GUID-11CCF92B-E9E7-409C-84D0-DFDEA1DCBE85 v1
The IED with accessories should be mounted in a cubicle in a restricted access

area within a power station, substation or industrial or retail environment.
2.3 Caution signs IP1503-1 v1
GUID-5D1412B8-8F9D-4D39-B6D1-60FB35797FD0 v1
Whenever changes are made in the IED, measures should be taken to avoid
inadvertent tripping.
GUID-F2A7BD77-80FB-48F0-AAE5-BE73DE520CC2 v1
The IED contains components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

ESD precautions shall always be observed prior to touching components.
24
Safety information
M2695-2 v2
Always transport PCBs (modules) using certified conductive bags.
M2696-2 v1
Do not connect live wires to the IED. Internal circuitry may be damaged
M2697-2 v2
Always use a conductive wrist strap connected to protective earth when

replacing modules. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may damage the module and
IED circuitry.
M2698-2 v2
Take care to avoid electrical shock during installation and commissioning.
M2693-2 v1
Changing the active setting group will inevitably change the IEDs operation. Be
careful and check regulations before making the change.
GUID-3BEE51C6-8793-4C89-B8A8-07D0FA6EE4CA v3
Avoid touching the enclosure of the coupling capacitor REX061 unit and the
shunt resistor REX062 unit. The surface may be hot during normal operation.
The temperature can rise 50°C in REX061 and 65°C in REX062 above the
ambient temperature.
2.4 Note signs IP1497-1 v1
M19-2 v3
Observe the maximum allowed continuous current for the different current
transformer inputs of the IED. See technical data.
25
26
Available functions
Section 3 Available functions
3.1 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v12.1.1
Table 2: Example of quantities
2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Generator
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
(Customized)
Differential protection
T2WPDIF 87T Transformer differential 0-2 1-A31 1-A33 1
protection, two winding
T3WPDIF 87T Transformer differential 0-2 1-A33 1
protection, three winding
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance 0-6 3-A02 3 6
differential protection
GENPDIF 87G Generator differential 0-2 1 2 2
protection
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault 0-3 1-A01 1
protection, low impedance
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone,
ZMQAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance
quadrilateral
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic
with fixed angle
ZMHPDIS 21 Fullscheme distance 0-4 3 3 3
protection, mho
characteristic
ZMMPDIS, 21 Fullscheme distance
ZMMAPDIS protection, quadrilateral for
earth faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance 0-2 1 1 1
element for mho
characteristic
ZDARDIR Additional distance
protection directional
function for earth faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision
logic
27
Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
(Customized)
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification

with load enchroachment
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone,
ZMRAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic,
separate settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic
with fixed angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance 0–1
protection, quadrilateral and
mho - 6 zones
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance 0–1
protection for series
compensated lines,
quadrilateral and mho - 6
zones
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection
PSPPPAM 78 Pole slip/out-of-step 0-1 1-B21 1-B21 1-B21
protection
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault
logic, voltage and current
based
LEXPDIS 40 Loss of excitation 0-2 1 2 2
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic
ROTIPHIZ 64R Sensitive rotor earth fault 0-1 1-B31 1-B31 1-B31
protection, injection based
STTIPHIZ 64S 100% stator earth fault 0-1 1-B32 1-B32 1-B32
protection, injection based
ZGVPDIS 21 Underimpedance protection 0–1 1 1 1
for generators and
transformers
3.2 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v10

REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
(Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase 0-4 1 2 2
overcurrent protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase overcurrent 0-6 4 4 4
protection
PH4SPTOC 51 Four step single phase
28
Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
(Customized)
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-2 1 2 2

EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual 0-6 1 5 5
67N2) overcurrent protection
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional 0-2 1-C41 2-C42 2-C42

negative phase sequence
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional 0-2 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
residual overcurrent and
power protection
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload 0-3 1 2 3
protection, two time
constant
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-4 2 4 4
CCSRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection,
single phase version
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-4 2 2 2
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower 0-4 2 4 4
protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower 0-4 2 4 4
protection
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check
NS2PTOC 46I2 Negative sequence time 0-2 1 1 1
overcurrent protection for
machines
AEGPVOC 50AE Accidental energizing 0-2 1 1 1
protection for synchronous
generator
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained 0-3 3-C36 3-C36 3-C36
GSPTTR 49S Stator overload protection 0-1 1-C37 1-C37 1-C37
GRPTTR 49R Rotor overload protection 0–1 1-C38 1-C38 1-C38
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage 0-2 2 2 2
protection
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage 0-2 2 2 2
protection
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual 0-3 3 3 3
overvoltage protection
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-2 1 1 2
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential 0-2 2 2 2
protection
STEFPHIZ 59THD 100% stator earth fault 0-1 1-D21 1 1
protection, 3rd harmonic
based
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check
29
Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
(Customized)
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 3 6 6
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 3 6 6
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency 0-3 1 3 3
protection
FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time 0-12 12-E03 12-E03 12-E03
accumulation protection
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage 1-12 6 6 6
protection
General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage
3.3 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v12

REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing 0-2 1 2 2
check and synchronizing
APC15 3 Apparatus control for single
bay, max 15 apparatuses
(2CBs) incl. interlocking
APC30 3 Apparatus control for up to 6 0-1 1-H09 1-H09 1-H09
bays, max 30 apparatuses
(6CBs) incl. interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1+5/APC30 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
APC30 APC3 APC3
0 0
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch 1+5/APC30 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
positions APC30 APC3 APC3
0 0
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1+5/APC30 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
APC30 APC3 APC3
0 0
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for
tap changer, single control
30
Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for

tap changer, parallel control
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and 0-4 1-A31 2-A33 2
supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control and 0-4
supervision, 32 binary inputs
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for 15 15 15 15
function selection and LHMI
presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20
DPGAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16
function for Double Point
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 8 5 5 5 5
signals
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command 3 3 3 3
function for DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4 4 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic 50 50 50 50
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position 50 50 50 50
and select for IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with 10 10 10 10
position for IEC 60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user 1 1 1 1
defined for IEC 60870-5-103
Secondary
system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-5 4 5 5
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 2 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision 0-3 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
based on voltage difference
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12 12 12 12
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5
31
Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic 40-280 40-28 40-28 40-28
LLD, OR, blocks (see Table 3) 0 0 0
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks 0–1
INDCOMBSPQT, Q/T (see Table 4)
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see 0–1
LLD, OR, Table 5)
PULSETIMER,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer 18 18 18 18
conversion
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer 16 16 16 16
conversion with Logic Node
representation
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 18 18 18 18
conversion
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 16 16 16 16
conversion with Logic Node
representation
TIGAPC Delay on timer with input 30 30 30 30
signal integration
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with 12 12 12 12
limit transgression and
overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer 12 12 12 12
inputs
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 12 12 12 12
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6 6 6
VMMXU, CMSQI,
VMSQI, VNMMXU
CMMXU Measurements 10 10 10 10
AISVBAS Function block for service 1 1 1 1
value presentation of
secondary analog inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20
32
Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1

A1RADR-A4RADR,
B1RBDR-B8RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication 64 64 64 64
function for Single Point
indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16
function for Single Point
indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication 24 24 24 24
function for Measured Value
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander 66 66 66 66
block
SSIMG 63 Gas medium supervision 21 21 21 21
SSIML 71 Liquid medium supervision 3 3 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 0-12 6-M15 12- 12-
M12 M12
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined 3 3 3 3
signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser 1 1 1 1
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault 1 1 1 1
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1 1 1 1
protection for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined 20 20 20 20
signals for IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit 30 30 30 30
supervision
TEILGAPC Running hour-meter 9 9 9 9
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy 6 6 6 6
calculation and demand
handling
33
Available functions
Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 280
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40
Table 4: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40
Table 5: Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 180
GATE 49
INV 180
LLD 49
OR 180
PULSETIMER 59
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 110
TIMERSET 49
VSGAPC 130
XOR 49
34
Available functions
3.4 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v12
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
(Customized)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between 1 1 1 1
SPA and IEC 60870-5-103 for
SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication 1 1 1 1
general protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication 1 1 1 1
general TCP protocol
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP communication protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP, communication protocol
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for 1 1 1 1
TCP/IP and EIA-485
IEC 61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via 59 59 59 59
GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64
receive a double point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to 32 32 32 32
receive an integer value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to 60 60 60 60
receive a measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64
receive a single point value
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND transmit
FRONT, LANABI, Ethernet configuration of links 1 1 1 1
LANAB, LANCDI,
LANCD
35
Available functions
REG670 (C30)
REG670 (A20)
REG670 (B30)
REG670
(Customized)
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of link 1 1 1 1

one
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1
communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial 1 1 1 1
communication for RS485
AGSAL Generic security application 1 1 1 1
component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping 1 1 1 1
security events on protocols
such as DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access via 1 1 1 1
FSTACCSNA SPA protocol over ethernet
communication
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1 1 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link 1 1 1 1
status
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link status 1 1 1 1
Process bus communication
IEC 61850-9-2 1)
PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel 0-1 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03
redundancy protocol
Remote communication
Binary signal transfer receive/ 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36
transmit
Transmission of analog data 1 1 1 1
from LDCM
Receive binary status from 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
remote LDCM
1) Only included for 9-2LE products
36
Available functions
3.5 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v9
Table 6: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
PRODINF Product information
RUNTIME IED Runtime Comp
CAMCONFIG Central account management configuration
37
Available functions
IEC 61850 or function Description

name
CAMSTATUS Central account management status
TOOLINF Tools Information component
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function
Table 7: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15
38
Starting up
Section 4 Starting up
4.1 Factory and site acceptance testing GUID-38C2B5FA-9210-4D85-BA21-39CE98A1A84A v2
Testing the proper IED operation is carried out at different occasions, for example:
• Acceptance testing
• Commissioning testing
• Maintenance testing
This manual describes the workflow and the steps to carry out the commissioning testing.
Factory acceptance testing (FAT) is typically done to verify that the IED and its corresponding
configuration meet the requirements of the utility or industry. This test is the most complex
and in depth, as it is done to familiarize the user with a new product or to verify a new
configuration. The complexity of this testing depends on several factors, such as:
• New IED type

• New configuration
• Modified configuration
Site acceptance testing (SAT or commissioning testing) is typically done to verify that the
installed IED is correctly set and connected to the power system. SAT requires that the
acceptance testing has been performed and that the application configuration is verified.
Maintenance testing is a periodic verification that the IED is healthy and has correct settings,
depending on changes in the power system. There are also other types of maintenance
testing.
4.2 Commissioning checklist GUID-93D14E4E-5DDE-4D37-84A6-2DF0656AB73D v3
Before starting up commissioning at site, check that the following items are available.
• Single line diagram

• Protection block diagram
• Circuit diagram
• Setting list and configuration
• RJ-45 Ethernet cable (CAT 5)
• Three-phase test kit or other test equipment depending on the complexity of the
configuration and functions to be tested.
• PC with PCM600 installed along with the connectivity packages corresponding to the IEDs
to be tested.
• Administration rights on the PC, to set up IP addresses
• Product documentation (engineering manual, installation manual, commissioning manual,
operation manual, technical manual and communication protocol manual)
39
Starting up
4.3 Checking the power supply M11725-2 v6
Do not insert anything else to the female connector but the corresponding
male connector. Inserting anything else (such as a measurement probe) may
damage the female connector and prevent a proper electrical contact between
the printed circuit board and the external wiring connected to the screw
terminal block.
Check that the auxiliary supply voltage remains within the permissible input voltage range
under all operating conditions. Check that the polarity is correct before energizing the IED.
4.4 Energizing the IED
4.4.1 Checking the IED operation M11726-2 v7
Check all connections to external circuitry to ensure correct installation, before energizing the
IED and carrying out the commissioning procedures.
Energize the power supply of the IED to start it up. Keep the DC power supply on until the Root
menu or the selected default screen is shown on the HMI before interrupting the DC power
supply again. The energization could be done in a number of ways, from energizing a whole
cubicle with many IEDs to energizing each single IED one by one.
If HW (i.e. I/O and/or communication boards etc.) have been changed (i.e. removed, replaced,
or added), the user should re-configure the IED by navigating in the local HMI menu to: Main
menu/Configuration/Reconfigure HW modules to activate the changed hardware modules in
order to enable the self-supervision function to detect possible hardware errors.
Check also the self-supervision function in Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General menu

in local HMI to verify that the IED operates properly.
Set the IED time if no time synchronization source is configured.
To ensure that the IED is according to the delivery and ordering specifications documents
delivered together with each IED, the user should also after start-up use the built in HMI to
check the IED's:
• Software version, Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers.

• Serial number, Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers.
• Installed modules and their ordering number, Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Installed HW.
4.4.2 IED start-up sequence M11727-3 v11
When the IED is energized, the green LED starts flashing instantly. After approximately 55
seconds the window lights up and the window displays ‘IED Startup’. The main menu is
displayed and the upper row should indicate ‘Ready’ after about 90 seconds. A steady green
light indicates a successful startup.
40
Starting up
1 2 3
t (s)
0 t1 t2
xx04000310-1-en.vsd
Figure 2: Typical IED start-up sequence
1 IED energized. Green LED instantly starts flashing

2 LCD lights up and "IED startup" is displayed
3 The main menu is displayed. A steady green light indicates a successful startup.
If the upper row in the window indicates ‘Fail’ instead of ‘Ready’ and the green LED flashes, an
internal failure in the IED has been detected. See section"Checking the self supervision
function" to investigate the fault.
4.5 Energizing REX060
4.5.1 REX060 start up sequence GUID-63A15CD3-17B0-41DD-9611-8272DDA53137 v1
When the injection unit REX060 is energized, the ABB logotype is shown followed by current
REX060 revision status. When the start up sequence is completed, the main menu (normal
display content) is shown. The duration of the start up sequence is a few seconds.
4.6 Setting up communication between PCM600 and the

IED SEMOD58570-5 v12
The communication between the IED and PCM600 is independent of the communication
protocol used within the substation or to the NCC.
The communication media is always Ethernet and the used protocol is TCP/IP.
Each IED has an RJ-45 Ethernet interface connector on the front. The front Ethernet connector
shall be used for communication with PCM600.
When an Ethernet-based station protocol is used, PCM600 communication can use the same
Ethernet port and IP address.
To connect PCM600 to the IED, two basic variants must be considered.
• Direct point-to-point link between PCM600 and the IED front port. The front port can be
seen as a service port.
• Indirect link via a station LAN or from remote via a network.
The physical connection and the IP address must be configured in both cases to enable
communication.
The communication procedures are the same in both cases.
41
Starting up
1. If needed, set the IP address for the IEDs.

2. Set up the PC or workstation for a direct link (point-to-point), or
3. Connect the PC or workstation to the LAN/WAN network.
4. Configure the IED IP addresses in the PCM600 project for each IED to match the IP
addresses of the physical IEDs.
Setting up IP addresses
The IP address and the corresponding communication subnetwork mask must be set via the
LHMI for each available Ethernet interface in the IED. Each Ethernet interface has a default
factory IP address when the IED is delivered. The IP adress and the subnetwork mask might
have to be reset when an additional Ethernet interface is installed or an interface is replaced.
• The default IP address for the IED front port is 10.1.150.3 and the corresponding
subnetwork mask is 255.255.255.0, which can be set via the local HMI path Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/FRONT:1.
Setting up the PC or workstation for point-to-point access to IEDs front

port
An ethernet cable (max 2 m length) with RJ-45 connectors is needed to connect two physical
Ethernet interfaces together without a hub, router, bridge or switch in between.
IED RJ-45
PCM600
Tx Tx
Rx Rx
Figure 3: Point-to-point link between IED and PCM600

The following description is an example valid for standard PCs using Microsoft Windows
operating system. The example is taken from a Laptop with one Ethernet interface.
Administrator rights are required to change the PC communication setup. It is

automatically detected that Tx signals from the IED are received on the Tx pin
on the PC. Thus, a straight (standard) Ethernet cable can be used.
1. Select Search programs and files in the Start menu in Windows.
42
Starting up
Figure 4: Select: Search programs and files

2. Type View network connections and click on the View network connections icon.
43
Starting up
Figure 5: Click View network connections

3. Right-click and select Properties.
Figure 6: Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties

4. Select the TCP/IPv4 protocol from the list of configured components using this
connection and click Properties.
44
Starting up
Figure 7: Select the TCP/IPv4 protocol and open Properties

5. Select Use the following IP address and define IP address and Subnet mask if the front
port is used and if the IP address is not set to be obtained automatically by the IED, see
Figure 8. The IP address must be different from the IP address chosen for the IED.
Figure 8: Select: Use the following IP address

6. Use the ping command to verify connectivity with the IED.
7. Close all open windows and start PCM600.
45
Starting up
The PC and IED must belong to the same subnetwork for this set-up to work.
Setting up the PC to access the IED via a network

The same method is used as for connecting to the front port.
The PC and IED must belong to the same subnetwork for this set-up to work.
4.7 Writing an application configuration to the IED M11734-2 v6
When writing a configuration to the IED with PCM600, the IED is automatically set in
configuration mode. When the IED is set in configuration mode, all functions are blocked. The
red LED on the IED flashes, and the green LED is lit while the IED is in the configuration mode.
When the configuration is written and completed, the IED is automatically set into normal
mode. For further instructions please refer to the users manuals for PCM600.
4.8 Checking CT circuits M12182-2 v15
Check that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied connection
diagram.
The CTs must be connected in accordance with the circuit diagram provided with the IED, both
with regards to phases and polarity. The following tests shall be performed on every primary
CT connected to the IED:
• Primary injection test to verify the current ratio of the CT, the correct wiring up to the
protection IED and correct phase sequence connection (that is L1, L2, L3.)
• Polarity check to prove that the predicted direction of secondary current flow is correct
for a given direction of primary current flow. This is an essential test for the proper
operation of the differential function and directional protection functions.
• CT secondary loop resistance measurement to confirm that the current transformer
secondary loop DC resistance is within the specification for the connected protection
functions. When the measured loop resistance is near the calculated value for maximum
DC resistance, perform a complete burden test.
• CT excitation test in order to confirm that the current transformer is of the correct
accuracy rating and that there are no shorted turns in the current transformer windings.
Manufacturer's design curves must be available for the current transformer to compare
the actual results.
• Earthing check of the individual CT secondary circuits to verify that each three-phase set
of main CTs is properly connected to the station earth and only at one electrical point.
• Insulation resistance check.
While the CT primary is energized, the secondary circuit shall never be open
circuited because extremely dangerous high voltages may arise.
46
Starting up
Both the primary and the secondary sides must be disconnected from the line
and the IED when plotting the excitation characteristics.
If the CT secondary circuit earth connection is removed without the current

transformer primary being de-energized, dangerous voltages may result in the
secondary CT circuits.
4.9 Checking VT circuits M11724-2 v10
Check that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied connection diagram.
Correct possible errors before continuing to test the circuitry.
Test the circuitry.
• Polarity check when applicable; this test is often omitted for CVTs
• VT circuit voltage measurement (primary injection test)
• Earthing check
• Phase relationship
• Insulation resistance check
The primary injection test verifies the VT ratio and the wiring all the way from the primary
system to the IED. Injection must be performed for each phase-to-neutral circuit.
While testing VT secondary circuit and associated secondary equipment, care

shall be exercised to isolate the VT from the circuit being tested to avoid
backcharging the VT from the secondary side.
4.10 Using the RTXP test switch GUID-F1E29C06-7FE8-44D8-AD5A-EE8990A2AA41 v5
The RTXP test switch is designed to provide the means of safe testing of the IED. This is
achieved by the electromechanical design of the test switch and test plug handle. When the
test plug handle is inserted, it first blocks the trip and alarm circuits then it short circuits the
CT secondary circuit and opens the VT secondary circuits making the IED available for
secondary injection.
When pulled out, the test handle is mechanically stopped in half withdrawn position. In this
position, the current and voltage enter the protection, but the alarm and trip circuits are still
isolated and the IED is in test mode. Before removing the test handle, check the measured
values in the IED.
Not until the test handle is completely removed, the trip and alarm circuits are restored for
operation.
47
Starting up
Verify that the contact sockets have been crimped correctly and that they are
fully inserted by tugging on the wires. Never do this with current circuits in
service.
Current circuit
1. Verify that the contacts are of current circuit type.

2. Verify that the short circuit jumpers are located in the correct slots.
Voltage circuit
1. Verify that the contacts are of voltage circuit type.

2. Check that no short circuit jumpers are located in the slots dedicated for voltage.
Trip and alarm circuits
1. Check that the correct types of contacts are used.
4.11 Checking the binary I/O circuits M11722-2 v3
Do not insert anything else to the female connector but the corresponding
male connector. Inserting anything else (such as a measurement probe) may
damage the female connector and prevent a proper electrical contact between
the printed circuit board and the external wiring connected to the screw
terminal block.
4.11.1 Binary input circuits M11722-4 v3
Preferably, disconnect the binary input connector from the binary input cards. Check all
connected signals so that both input level and polarity are in accordance with the IED
specifications.
4.11.2 Binary output circuits M11722-8 v3
Preferably, disconnect the binary output connector from the binary output cards. Check all
connected signals so that both load and polarity are in accordance with IED specifications.
4.12 Checking optical connections M16022-2 v7
Check that the Tx and Rx optical connections are correct.
An IED equipped with optical connections has an minimum space requirement

of 180 mm for plastic fiber cables and 275 mm for glass fiber cables. Check the
allowed minimum bending radius from the optical cable manufacturer.
48
Configuring the IED and changing settings
Section 5 Configuring the IED and changing

settings
5.1 Overview M11730-2 v6
The customer specific values for each setting parameter and a configuration file have to be
available before the IED can be set and configured, if the IED is not delivered with a
configuration.
Use the configuration tools in PCM600 to verify that the IED has the expected configuration.
Each function included in the IED has several setting parameters, which have to be set in order
to make the IED behave as intended. A factory default value is provided for each
parameter.The Parameter Setting Tool in PCM600 is used when changing setting parameters.
All settings can be
• Entered manually through the local HMI.

• Written from a PC, either locally or remotely using PCM600. Front or rear port
communication has to be established before the settings can be written to the IED.
Make sure that the DC supply is not turned off when the IED saves the written
configuration.
The IED uses a FLASH disk for storing configuration data and process data like counters,
object states, Local/Remote switch position etc. Since FLASH memory is used, measures have
been taken in software to make sure that the FLASH disk is not worn out by too intensive
storing of data.
This means, that to be absolutely sure that all data have been saved to FLASH, it is necessary
to leave the IED with auxiliary power connected after all the commissioning is done (including
setting the Local/Remote switch to the desired position) for at least one hour after the last
commissioning action performed on the IED.
After that time has elapsed, it will be safe to turn the IED off, no data will be lost.
5.2 Configuring analog CT inputs M12312-6 v8
The analog input channels must be configured to get correct measurement results as well as
correct protection functionality. Because all protection algorithms in the IED utilize the
primary system quantities, it is extremely important to make sure that connected current
transformer settings are done properly. These data are calculated by the system engineer and
normally set by the commissioner from the local HMI or from PCM600.
The analog inputs on the transformer input module are dimensioned for either 1A or 5A. Each
transformer input module has a unique combination of current and voltage inputs. Make sure
the input current rating is correct and that it matches the order documentation.
The primary CT data are entered via the HMI menu under Main menu/Configurations/Analog
modules
49
Configuring the IED and changing settings
The following parameter shall be set for every current transformer connected to the IED:
Table 8: CT configuration
Parameter description Parameter name Range Default
Rated CT primary current in A CTPRIMn from 0 to 99999 3000
n = channel number
This parameter defines the primary rated current of the CT. For two set of CTs with ratio
1000/1 and 1000/5 this parameter is set to the same value of 1000 for both CT inputs. The
parameter CTStarPoint can be used in order to reverse the direction of the CT. This might be
necessary if two sets of CTs have different star point locations in relation to the protected
busbar.
For main CTs with 2A rated secondary current, it is recommended to connect the secondary
wiring to the 1A input.
Take the rated permissive overload values for the current inputs into
consideration.
5.3 Reconfiguring the IED M11728-2 v2
I/O modules configured with PCM600 (BIM, BOM or IOM) are supervised.
I/O modules that are not configured are not supervised.
Each logical I/O module has an error flag that indicates signal or module failure. The error flag
is also set when the physical I/O module of the correct type is not detected in the connected
slot.
50
Calibrating injection based sensitive rotor earth fault protection
Section 6 Calibrating injection based sensitive

rotor earth fault protection
6.1 Commissioning process GUID-837911AC-D87E-4E10-9D7D-B74A9F45A815 v1
The commissioning process utilizes the commissioning tool ICT. The instructions for the
process cover installation, calibration, commissioning, monitoring and auditing for the
sensitive rotor earth fault ROTIPHIZ function.
6.2 Commissioning tool ICT GUID-0C099215-B194-4212-AE81-15F840E24C50 v4
The sensitive rotor earth fault protection function in IED requires a number of settings. The
settings k1, k2 and the reference impedance require measurements on the generator
performed by the ICT (injection commissioning tool). The factors are derived in connection to
the calibration measurements during commissioning. ICT is an integrated part of the PCM600
tool.
Furthermore, ICT also assists the commissioning engineer to perform a successful installation
because of its structure and validating capabilities. During installation, commissioning and
calibration, ICT performs various tests to verify that the installation is acceptable and the
calibration successful. Besides carrying out the actual tests, ICT also provides the
commissioning engineer with tips if needed during the commissioning.
When ICT is started, rotor earth fault protection is chosen.
There are five different parts of the ICT tool to be performed at commissioning and operation:
1. Installing
2. Calibrating
3. Commissioning
4. Monitoring
5. Auditing
Before proceeding make sure that all necessary connections are in place.
Installing
During the installation, several checks are performed about both status of the function and
levels of the injected current and voltage. The check of signal levels need the setting of the
gain according to the value that is selected in REX060.
A fine measurement of the frequency of the injected signals is also performed.
Calibrating
The calibration is based on three measurement steps:
1. The injection is made to the faultless generator and the measured complex impedance is
stored.
2. A known resistance is connected between one rotor pole (see Figure 9) and earth. The
injection is made to the generator and the measured complex impedance is stored.
3. One rotor pole (see Figure 9) is directly short-circuited to the earth. The injection is made
to the generator and the measured complex impedance is stored.
51
During the three steps described above a check is made that there are sufficient changes in
the measured impedance in order to guarantee that there is no primary fault from the
beginning or other problems due to the installation or calibration procedure.
The sequence of the calibration session follows a scheme shown in the tool.
• Calibration sequence 1: The injection must be activated and the rotor must be left with no
impedance connected. The ICT now makes consecutive measurements until the statistical
error reaches an acceptable value. This is graphically shown in a diagram. The user stops
the sequence by acceptance of the measurement. The result is stored for later
calculations.
• Calibration sequence 2: A known resistor is connected between the rotor winding and
earth. The value of the resistance is the input to ICT. The ICT now makes consecutive
measurements until the statistical error reaches an acceptable value. This is graphically
shown in a diagram. The user stops the sequence by acceptance of the measurement. The
result is stored for later calculations.
• Calibration sequence 3: The generator rotor winding is now directly connected to earth.
The ICT now makes consecutive measurements until the statistical error reaches an
acceptable value. This is graphically shown in a diagram. The user stops the sequence by
acceptance of the measurement. The result is stored for later calculations.
The sequence of the calibration steps is driven by ICT and it is shown in the figure below.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
DC DC DC
Crot C rot Crot
AC AC AC
REX061 REX061 REX061

I inj I inj Iinj
RTest
Figure 9: Different steps at calibration measurements

After the three steps ICT calculates the complex factors k1 and k2. The reference impedance
RefR1 + jRefX1 is also calculated. After this the values are downloaded to the parameter setting
in PCM600. From PCM600 the settings are downloaded to IED.
Now the reference impedance is derived for one operational state. It might be necessary to
make measurements to derive reference impedance for other operational cases. For
information on this, see Commissioning below.
Commissioning
Different operating conditions of the machine may require different reference impedances.
If a particular operating condition of the generator requires a second reference impedance,

the Commissioning tab of ICT is used to define and save the second reference.
If more than one reference impedance are to be used, there must be a logic configured to
detect when the generator is in such condition and change the reference.
Monitoring
The Monitoring tab of ICT offers the possibility to monitor several quantities during tests as
well as in normal operating condition in order to evaluate the behavior of the protection
function. It can help in the identification of the operating conditions, where a change of
reference impedance is required.
52
Auditing
In the auditing part installation, calibration and commissioning reports are stored.
6.3 Launching injection commissioning tool (ICT) and

performing the installation GUID-15CAE2A3-FA17-4119-9188-824C7F309D4B v3
1. Make sure you have not attached any additional impedance in parallel with the rotor
circuit. All wirings shall be finalized and they shall be the definitive ones. All primary and
secondary devices shall be connected and switched on. All grounding of generator shall
be removed. The generator shall be in a condition that is as close as possible to the
normal operating condition.
2. Activate the injection by turning the injection switch to on position on the injection unit
REX060.
3. To launch the Injection commissioning tool (ICT), right-click REG670 in the PCM plant
structure and select the Injection commissioning.
4. In the ICT toolbar, select the Rotor Earth Fault function.
Figure 10: ICT toolbar

5. Select the Installing tab if it was not already selected by default after the ICT was
launched.
The first thing that needs to be ensured before the calibration is that the measured
voltage and current signal on the injected frequency is present/found, and that their
amplitude is within the permitted limits.
6. Write the value of the “Gain” according to the setting in REX060. Select the Start reading
values from IED button from the ICT toolbar to start performing continuous
measurements.
7. Verify that the bars/voltage levels for both the voltage and current on the injected
frequency have acceptable level.
The bars must be green and the function status field must also indicate OK.
8. Check that the actual injected frequency is close enough to the injection frequency set on
the injection unit (REX060).
If the voltage and/or current level(s)/frequencies are not reasonable, or the ICT indicates
other warnings/abnormalities in the function status field, verify that the HW connections
are correct (cables etc.), and selected gains and injection frequency on the REX060 are
properly set. Then repeat steps 3 to 6. Note that the FreqInjected setting in Parameter
setting for the specific function must correspond with the chosen injection frequency on
the REX060 HMI for that function.
53
Frequency found by Voltage and current signal Ffunction status field. Errors and
the function staus and TRIP indication abnormalities are displayed in order
to simplify trouble shooting.
GUID-84947C77-215F-4007-AAC0-9433B8444396 V1 EN-US
Figure 11: ICT signals and function indication panel

9. When the installing procedure is successful, select the Submit and save in report button.
ICT will now forward a more accurate frequency to Parameter setting. In the Parameter
setting tool, write the newly acquired parameter to IED.
The accurate setting of this frequency is essential for proper operation of the protection
under different operating conditions.
6.4 Performing calibration GUID-DE96CE75-A268-4FE1-AD9D-093EA1F2ECBA v3
1. From the Calibrating tab, select the first sub tab, i.e. Step1: Measurement 1.
2. Make sure you have not attached any additional impedance in parallel with the rotor.
The generator shall be in a condition that is as close as possible to the normal operating
condition as during the Installation.
3. From the ICT toolbar, select the Start reading values from IED button.
The ICT performs consecutive measurements until the statistical error reaches an
acceptable value. This is graphically shown in a diagram.
It is very important that calibration steps (step 1, step 2 and step 3) are
performed in the proper order. If not, the calibration might fail. If readings
are not stable during the step, a warning to repeat the step may be
suggested; the step shall be repeated in order to avoid that the
calibration fails.
4. When the statistical error of the performed continuous measurements reaches an

acceptable value, the indicator bar reaches the stability region (turned green), and it is
allowed to select the Submit button.
Clicking the Submit button the result is stored for later calculations. ICT automatically
shifts to the second calibration sub tab, Step 2: Measurement 2.
54
Stability region
indicator bar
GUID-3C7F0567-2367-46E4-9606-FCFC7408DAA0 V1 EN-US
Figure 12: ICT calibration tab 1 including the stability region indicator bar
5. Connect a calibration resistance between one pole of the field winding and ground; the
value of the calibration resistance can be calculated as the impedance to ground of the
rotor:
1
Rcal ≅ Z rot ≅
2 ⋅ π ⋅ f inj ⋅ Crot
IECEQUATION17027 V2 EN-US
where,
finj is the frequency of the signal injected by REX60
Crot is the total capacitance to ground of the rotor winding
If the capacitance to ground of the rotor is unknown, a calibration resistance with
tentative value equal to 5000 Ω can be used. This tentative value shall be assessed after
the calibration procedure is completed.
In order to perform the assessment, the first reference impedance, which is calculated
during the tentative calibration, is assumed as an evaluation of the rotor impedance to
ground:
Z rot  Re R122  Re
Re ffR fX112
RefX
The assessment of the calibration is positive if:
Z rot − Rcal
0< ≤x
Z rot
The typical higher limit x can be in range between 1% and 5%. If the assessment is
negative, the calibration shall be repeated with a calibration resistance close to the
absolute value of the estimated rotor impedance to ground.
6. Type the value in ohm of the calibration resistance in the real part of the Connected
impedance field and type 0 in the imaginary part field.
This informs the ICT that we have connected a pure resistive impedance that has a value
equal to the typed one.
7. In the ICT toolbar, select the Start reading values from IED button.
55
8. Once again, wait until the stability criteria is fulfilled, then select the Submit button.
The result is stored for later calculations. ICT automatically shifts to the third calibration
tab, Step 3: Measurement 3.
If readings are not stable during the step, a warning to repeat the step
may be suggested; the step shall be repeated in order to avoid that the
calibration fails.
9. Remove the known fault resistance attached earlier and apply a short circuit instead.
11. When the stability criteria are fulfilled, select the Submit button once again.
The result is stored for calculations. ICT automatically shifts to the fourth calibration tab,
Step 4: Save Calibration Factors. Here the newly calculated complex factors k1 and k2 as
well as the reference impedance 1 are presented. The values of these parameters are
calculated by ICT on the basis of the three measurement steps described above.
may be suggested; the step shall be repeated in order to avoid that the
calibration fails.
12. ICT performs several checks on the measurement results of each steps in order to verify
that the change among measured impedances of the three steps is high enough (too low
changes may be related to a grounded system at the beginning of the calibration) and
that no problem affected the installation and calibration procedure.
Check the Calibration result field to make sure that all tests have been passed.
12.1. If a failure is indicated during one or more check(s), follow the instructions/tips
provided by the ICT in the Calibration result field.
12.2. If these tips do not solve the issue, then contact ABB Support.
56
Figure 13: ICT calibration tab 4

13. Before proceeding any further make sure that you have removed the short-circuit that
was applied during the Step 3 of the calibration.
14. To finish the calibration process, select the Submit to Parameter setting button.
15. In Parameter setting, write the newly acquired parameters to IED.
6.5 Acquiring references GUID-AC1645F9-9B48-4F6A-9D81-BDCB7382533E v3
A logic outside the protection function is needed in order to detect different operation
conditions of the generator and select the proper impedance reference. Therefore changing/
switching impedance reference is not described here but in a separate application note
1MRG005030 Application example for injection based 100% Stator EF and Sensitive Rotor EF
protection.
The injection commissioning tool (ICT) helps the commissioning engineer to acquire an
additional reference for different conditions of the generator. The below description assumes
that reference 1 was set during calibration and that the second reference must be set now.
If the second reference impedance shall be defined and the logic to switch from the first
impedance to the second one is already active in the configuration, then set the second
reference impedance equal to the first reference impedance before starting the procedure in
the Commissioning tab. The trip of the function should be blocked, as advised by the pop-up
window of ICT.
1. Ensure that the generator is in a state where the reference must be set (for example
normal operation).
2. To start, select the Commissioning tab.
3. In the Reference impedance selection drop-down menu. select Reference 2.
57
4. To start reading the measurements, click the Start reading values from IED button in the
ICT toolbar.
ICT starts to read the selected viewed quantity from IED and plots values on the X/Y
graph.
Measured absolute Measured absolute

impedance Floating average of the impedance ± standard
measured absolute deviation
impedance
Reference Impedance
Selection dropdown
menu
GUID-FAE32C52-80F0-4AEF-AA0D-6BA39F896712 V1 EN-US
Figure 14: Commissioning tab

Normally continuous readings are performed and the read absolute impedance is viewed
in the plot.
By observing the standard deviation of the measured impedance, the commissioning
engineer can decide if the impedance of the generator is stable/settled, and also if the
average impedance is based on enough values so that statistically the signal noise is
“filtered out”. This results in a fairly accurate impedance measurement which can be used
as a second reference.
5. Click the Select button when the standard deviation has converged so that its magnitude
is within the noise level of the measured absolute impedance.
In the second commissioning sub tab, Step2 : Save Reference Impedance, the measured
real and imaginary reference 2 impedance is presented.
6. Select the Submit to Parameter setting button.
This forwards the newly acquired reference to Parameter setting.
7. Write the newly acquired real and imaginary parts of Reference 2 to IED.
6.6 Verifying calibration GUID-3805BA77-6369-4798-8E1B-1201A0B9C68A v3
After the calibration is performed, it is appropriate to verify that known faults are measured as
expected and that the function is indicating trips and alarms when it should, in other words
that the calibration was successful. For this purpose the monitoring feature can be used.
1. In the ICT toolbar, select the fourth tab, Monitoring.
58
Selectable quantity for

Currently used reference Selectable graph
plotting
update period
Currently measured
impedance and its
Logger feature
average
GUID-DCE099B6-4DBA-4A52-9566-0E20B8AF7712 V1 EN-US
Figure 15: Monitoring tab

2. Set the graph update period to one second by typing 1 into the Graph update period
field.
3. To start continuously plotting values on the graph with one second interval, select Start
reading values from IED.
By default the measured absolute impedance is plotted, however there are several items
that can be viewed when monitoring. To see these ones, select the available quantities
under the Viewed quantity drop-down menu under the Monitoring tab.
4. Observe the fault conductance while applying known faults.
Both the calibration factors and the reference that is used can be verified this way. In
some cases though, it is desired to be able to measure/view other quantities.
5. Select Fault conductance in the Viewed quantity drop-down menu.
The fault conductance is equal to 1/fault resistance, and is more suitable to view when no
faults or very high values of fault resistance are applied/measured.
Due to the fact that no fault theoretically equals infinite fault resistance and viewing this
only plots unreliable values, it is better to view the fault conductance, which is zero in this
case.
As no fault is applied, the measured fault conductance must be close to zero. Confirm
this by viewing the graph.
It may be necessary to zoom in or out to properly view the measurements. For
instructions on this, see Editing features in graph.
6. Apply for example 9kΩ fault resistance.
6.1. Make sure that it is correctly measured.
6.2. Try to change the Viewed quantity to Fault resistance in order to verify the value of
the applied test resistance.
You should be able to measure approximately 9kΩ here. If you choose to view fault
conductance, the measurement corresponds to approximately 1.11×10-4 Mho.
7. Apply another known fault, say 1kΏ and verify that it is measured correctly.
8. Apply a short circuit and monitor the measurement: the measured resistance shall be
close to 0Ω; the value of this measurement is an offset that will affect all performed
measurements. If this value deviates from zero more than 10% of the Trip setting, a new
calibration shall be performed with a better calibration resistance at the second step:
that may increase the accuracy of measurements.
9. When you are completely sure that the function measures correctly, stop the
measurements and remove any applied faults.
59
Previously it was verified that the function measures correctly by applying known faults
and observing the graph during monitoring. Besides measuring the fault size a trip
indication is required when a large fault is measured to prevent that a damage to the
generator occurs. To allow the specific function to issue a trip indication, it must first be
enabled:
9.1. Select the Enable Function Tripping button in the ICT toolbar.
9.2. Choose Yes in the pop-up message.
ICT now writes this to IED.
9.3. By default the trip level is set to 1kΩ. In other words, if the fault resistance is lower,
then the function issue trips.
10. Verify the measurements by applying various faults.
Trip indication shall be visible in the ICT toolbar.
11. Verify that TRIP and ALARM signals are connected to tripping/alarming/signaling/
communication in accordance with the scheme design.
It is very important that the Function Tripping is Enabled under the following
situations:
• After completion of the calibration step

• Before leaving the ICT Tool
6.7 Auditing GUID-70137BAD-6BD5-4835-964E-B6ADAE522A15 v1
During installations, calibrations and commissions the ICT generates reports for each of the
steps and collects them under the Auditing tab. See the procedures below on how to view and
delete reports as well as generate logs from reports.
1. To view the reports, go to the Auditing tab.
GUID-8348F60B-9BF5-4018-9740-0FA3371B0F9F V1 EN-US
Figure 16: Auditing tab

2. Open and view each report.
3. View reports in one of the following ways:
60
• In the short cut menu, right click and select View report.
• Click the View report button in the upper right corner of the auditing screen.
• Double click a report record.
4. Delete reports in one of the following ways:
• In the short cut menu, right click and select Delete report.
• Click the Delete report button in the upper right corner of the auditing screen.
• Select a record with the mouse cursor then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
5. Generate logs in one of the following ways:
• In the short cut menu, right click and select Generate log.
• Click the Generate log button.
Besides generating a report you can also generate a log file with the same information as
for the report. Open and see the details of the file in Notepad or MS Excel.
After a successful generation of the log, the system confirms with a message along with
the path of the log file.
6.8 Editing features in graph GUID-B2784230-2355-4D4A-AAF0-34864C8D3190 v2
You can do the following operations on the graph during calibration, commissioning and
monitoring:
• Zoom in
• Zoom out
• Cancel zoom
• Enable X-zooming
• Enable Y-zooming
1. Zoom in one of the following ways:

• Right click a graph and select Zoom in or Zoom out in the shortcut menu.
GUID-3F080E48-8B77-48A0-8283-89511E1AE50B V1 EN-US
Figure 17: Zooming via the shortcut menu

• Use the mouse to zoom in and select a part of the graph area.
61
GUID-261171B2-59CD-4248-B873-39A2BC3CD1F1 V1 EN-US
Figure 18: Zooming via area selection of a part of the graph

• Press PgUp key on the keyboard to zoom in and PgDn to zoom out.
2. Cancel a zoom in the following ways:

• Right click a graph and select Cancel Zoom in the shortcut menu.
The graph area is squeezed to the original size.
• Press Esc.
3. Enable X and Y zooming
• To enable and disable X zooming, right click the graph and select or deselect Enable
X zooming in the shortcut menu.
• To enable and disable Y zooming, right click the graph and select or deselect Enable
Y zooming in the shortcut menu.
6.9 Logging measurements to file GUID-C86EC2DF-88F0-4272-8988-583778B5F2AE v2
In addition to viewing online plotted data under the Monitoring tab, it is also possible to log
quantities to a file (tabbed text file) that can be viewed in the graph. Besides this voltage levels
measured by the function and also error codes are logged. This file can then be imported to
other tools for deeper analysis when needed. The logger feature is available on the lower right
corner of the Monitoring tab. Note that the logger is independent of graph plotting.
1. Select the Browse button.

See figure 15.
2. Navigate to a desired folder.
3. Type a suitable file name for the .txt file and select Save.
4. To start logging to this file, select the Start button.
ICT continuously logs data to this file with logging interval set under graph update
period. Notice that there is a field named Log period and its default value is 1 hour. The
period can be adjusted before the logging is started, if needed.
5. The logging can be stopped by selecting the Stop button.
6. You can open the file in notepad or MS Excel.
62
Calibrating injection based 100% stator earth fault protection
Section 7 Calibrating injection based 100%

stator earth fault protection
7.1 Commissioning process GUID-F7897190-70E1-4421-984B-8E0F06BB93CD v1
The commissioning process utilizes the commissioning tool ICT. The instructions for the
process cover installation, calibration, commissioning, monitoring and auditing for the 100%
stator earth fault STTIPHIZ function.
7.2 Commissioning tool ICT GUID-06D3DD66-7D49-4D92-A175-AD1AE5ED19C3 v3
The 100% stator earth fault protection STTIPHIZ functions in IED requires a number of
settings. The settings k1, k2 and the reference impedance require measurements on the
generator performed by the ICT (injection commissioning tool). The factors are derived in
connection to the calibration measurements during commissioning. The ICT tool is an
integrated part of the PCM600 tool.
Furthermore, ICT also assists the commissioning engineer to perform a successful installation
because of its structure and validating capabilities. During installation, commissioning and
calibration, ICT performs various tests to verify that the installation is acceptable and the
calibration successful. Besides carrying out the actual tests, ICT also provides the
commissioning engineer with tips if such are needed during the commissioning.
When ICT is started, 100% stator earth fault protection is chosen.
There are five different parts of the ICT tool to be performed during commissioning and
operation:
1. Installing
2. Calibrating
3. Commissioning
4. Monitoring
5. Auditing
Before proceeding make sure that all necessary connections are in place.
Installing
During the installation, several checks are performed about both status of the function and
levels of the injected current and voltage. The check of signal levels need the setting of the
UMaxEF according to the value that is selected in REX060: this parameter is related to the gain
of amplifiers of REX060.
A fine measurement of the frequency of the injected signals is also performed to be able to
detect properly interference conditions.
Calibrating
The calibration is based on three measurement steps.
63
1. The injection is made to the faultless generator and the measured complex impedance is
stored.
2. A known resistance is connected between the generator neutral point (see Figure 19) and
earth.
The injection is made to the generator and the measured complex impedance is stored.
3. The generator neutral point (see Figure 19) is directly short-circuited to the earth. The
injection is made to the generator and the measured complex impedance is stored.
The sequence of the calibration steps is driven by ICT and it is shown in the figure below. The
connection of the calibration resistance and short circuit is shown here for the case with
injection in the generator neutral point through the neutral point VT and generator grounding
through primary resistor.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Cstat Cstat C stat
Iinj I inj Iinj

a a a
+ + +
RN Uinj Rtest RN Uinj RN Uinj
- - -
b b b
GUID-9E470F57-D670-430C-BD27-CBF11AF92D1E V1 EN-US
Figure 19: Different steps at calibration measurements

There are other generator grounding methods and injection alternatives; the injection can be
performed through:
• LV winding of a distribution transformer (DT) located at the stator neutral point

• Open delta winding of a three-phase VT set located at generator terminals
• Open delta winding of a three-phase grounding transformer (GT) located at generator
terminals
Whatever injection alternative is used, the neutral point of the generator must be accessible in
order to connect the calibration resistance (step 2) and short circuit (step 3) during the
calibration.
Commissioning
The generator can be in several operating conditions, for example:
• Generator stand still

• Generator running up, not synchronized to the network (circuit breaker open)
• Generator normal operation (circuit breaker closed)
Other operating conditions can be identified.
Different operating conditions of the machine may require different reference impedances.
64
If a particular stable operating condition of the generator requires a dedicated reference

impedance, it can be defined and saved by the Commissioning tab of ICT.
Up to five reference impedances can be defined for the protection function STTIPHIZ.
The first reference impedances is defined during the calibration.
ICT also performs a verification between the new reference impedance(s) and existing
reference impedance(s), and warns the user if the resulting estimated resistance difference
could cause alarm or trip when one reference is shifted from another during operation.
If more than one reference impedance is to be used, a logic must be configured to detect such
changes in the operating conditions and enable the related reference impedance. For example,
a logic can be based on the following conditions in order to select the active reference
impedance automatically:
1. Generator voltage < set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference impedance 1
2. Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference impedance 2
3. Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker closed: Reference impedance 3
For more information see separate application note 1MRG005030 Application example for
injection based 100% Stator EF and Sensitive Rotor EF protection.
Monitoring
The Monitoring tab of ICT offers the possibility to monitor several quantities during tests as
well as in normal operating condition in order to evaluate the behavior of the protection
function. It can help in the identification of the operating conditions, where change of
reference impedance is required.
Auditing
In the auditing part installation, calibration and commissioning reports are stored.
7.3 Launching injection commissioning tool (ICT) and

performing the installation GUID-7CDFB043-26E1-4169-9D2C-BE7C5C08AEAE v3
1. Make sure you have not connected any additional impedance in parallel with the stator
circuit. All wirings shall be finalized and they shall be the definitive ones. All primary and
secondary devices shall be connected and switched on. All grounding of generator shall
be removed. The generator shall be in a condition that is as close as possible to the
normal operating condition.
2. Activate the injection by turning the injection switch to on position on the injection unit
REX060.
3. To launch the Injection commissioning tool (ICT), right-click REG670 in the PCM plant
structure and select the Injection commissioning.
4. In the ICT toolbar, select the 100% Stator Earth Fault function.
65
Function selection Button for Buttons for start/stop

dropdown menu enable/disable reading from IED
tripping
GUID-3C378090-E33E-4AAA-8BBE-09FA872D9A87 V1 EN-US
Figure 20: ICT toolbar

5. Select the Installing tab if it was not already selected by default after the ICT was
launched.
The first thing that needs to be ensured before the calibration is that the measured
voltage and current signal at the injected frequency is present/found, and that their
amplitude is within the permitted limits.
6. Write the value “UMaxEF” according to the setting in REX060. Select the Start reading
values from IED button from the ICT toolbar to start performing continuous
measurements.
7. Verify that the bars/voltage levels for both the voltage and current on the injected
frequency have acceptable level.
The bars must be green and the function status field must also indicate OK.
8. Check that the actual injected frequency is close enough to the injection frequency set on
the injection unit (REX060).
If the voltage and/or current level(s)/frequencies are not reasonable, or the ICT indicates
other warnings/abnormalities in the function status field, verify that the HW connections
are correct (cables etc.), and selected UMaxEF and injection frequency on the REX060 are
properly set. Then repeat steps 3 to 6. Note that the FreqInjected setting in Parameter
setting for the specific function must correspond with the chosen injection frequency on
the REX060 HMI for that function.
Frequency found by Voltage and current signal Ffunction status field. Errors and
the function staus and TRIP indication abnormalities are displayed in order
to simplify trouble shooting.
GUID-84947C77-215F-4007-AAC0-9433B8444396 V1 EN-US
Figure 21: ICT signals and function indication panel

9. When the installing procedure is successful, select the Submit and save in report button.
ICT will now forward a more accurate frequency to Parameter setting. In the Parameter
setting tool, write the newly acquired parameter to IED.
The accurate setting of this frequency is essential for proper operation of the protection
under different operating conditions.
7.4 Performing calibration GUID-9304B342-8BCF-49E3-8429-E64919DC8EBD v4
1. From the Calibrating tab, select the first sub tab, i.e. Step1: Measurement 1.
2. Make sure you have not attached any additional impedance in parallel with the stator.
The generator shall be in a condition that is as close as possible to the normal operating
condition as during the Installation.
3. From the ICT toolbar, select the Start reading values from IED button.
ICT now performs continuous measurements and after the tenth measurement it starts
to update the graph. Notice that the stability region indicator bar reduces in size.
66
It is important that calibration steps (Step 1, Step 2 and Step 3) are

performed in the proper order. If not, the calibration might fail. If readings
are not stable during the step, a warning to repeat the step may be
suggested; the step shall be repeat in order to avoid that the calibration
fails.
4. When the statistical error of the performed continuous measurements reaches an

acceptable value, the indicator bar reaches the stability region (turned green) and it is
allowed to select the Submit button.
Clicking the Submit button, the result is stored for later calculations. ICT automatically
shifts to the second calibration sub tab, Step2: Measurement 2.
Stability region
indicator bar
GUID-3C7F0567-2367-46E4-9606-FCFC7408DAA0 V1 EN-US
Figure 22: ICT calibration tab 1 including the stability region indicator bar
5. Connect a calibration resistance Rcal between the neutral point of the generator and
ground; the value of the calibration resistance can be selected on the basis of the
impedance to ground of the stator:
Z stat ≤ Rcal ≤ 2 ⋅ Z stat

The stator impedance to ground can be estimated by one of the below quantities:
• The total impedance to ground of the stator windings at the injection frequency:
1
Z stat =
1
+ jωCstat
RN
where,
RN is the primary grounding resistor
Cstat is the total capacitance to ground of all three stator windings and of equipment
connected to the terminal of the generator
• The total impedance to ground of the stator windings at the injection frequency
taking into account the equivalent resistance RN, eq of the grounding resistor
transferred to the primary side of the grounding transformer:
67
1
Z stat =
1
+ jωCstat
RN , eq
If the capacitance to ground of the stator is unknown, a calibration resistance with

tentative value equal to 1000 Ω can be used. This tentative value shall be assessed after
the calibration procedure is completed.
In order to perform the assessment, the first reference impedance, which is calculated
during the tentative calibration is assumed as an evaluation of the stator impedance to
ground.
Z stat ≅ Re fR12 + Re fX 12
The assessment of the calibration is positive if:
500Ω ≤ Z stat ≤ 1000Ω

If the assessment is negative, the calibration shall be repeated with a calibration

resistance close to the absolute value of the estimated stator impedance to ground.
6. Type the value in ohm of the calibration resistance in the real part of the Connected
impedance field and type 0 in the imaginary part field.
This informs the ICT that we have connected a pure resistive impedance that has a value
equal to the typed one.
ICT performs again consecutive measurements until the statistical error reaches an
8. Once again, wait until the stability criteria is fulfilled, then select the Submit button.
The result is stored for later calculations. ICT automatically shifts to the third calibration
tab, Step 3: Measurement 3.
may be suggested; the step shall be repeat in order to avoid that the
calibration fails.
9. Remove the known fault resistance attached earlier and apply a short circuit instead.
ICT performs again consecutive measurements until the statistical error reaches an
11. When the stability criteria are fulfilled, select the Submit button once again.
The result is stored for calculations. ICT automatically shifts to the fourth calibration tab,
Step 4: Save Calibration Factors. Here the newly calculated complex factors k1 and k2 as
well as the reference impedance 1 are presented. The values of these parameters are
calculated by ICT on the basis of the three measurement steps described above.
12. ICT performs several checks on the measurement results of each steps in order to verify
that there are sufficient changes in the measured impedances (too low changes may be
related to a grounded system at the beginning of the calibration) and that no problem
affected the installation and calibration procedure.
Check the Calibration result field to make sure that all tests have been passed.
12.1. If a failure is indicated during one or more check(s), follow the instructions/tips
provided by the ICT in the Calibration result field.
12.2. If these tips do not solve the issue, then contact ABB Support.
68
GUID-D024D8B7-45F3-42D1-AAA3-488A2996267B V1 EN-US
Figure 23: ICT calibration tab 4

13. Before proceeding any further make sure that you have removed the short-circuit that
was applied during calibration step 3.
14. To finish the calibration process, select the Submit to Parameter setting button.
15. In Parameter setting, write the newly acquired parameters to IED.
7.5 Acquiring references GUID-AC1645F9-9B48-4F6A-9D81-BDCB7382533E v3
A logic outside the protection function is needed in order to detect different operation
conditions of the generator and select the proper impedance reference. Therefore changing/
switching impedance reference is not described here but in a separate application note
1MRG005030 Application example for injection based 100% Stator EF and Sensitive Rotor EF
protection.
The injection commissioning tool (ICT) helps the commissioning engineer to acquire an
additional reference for different conditions of the generator. The below description assumes
that reference 1 was set during calibration and that the second reference must be set now.
If the second reference impedance shall be defined and the logic to switch from the first
impedance to the second one is already active in the configuration, then set the second
reference impedance equal to the first reference impedance before starting the procedure in
the Commissioning tab. The trip of the function should be blocked, as advised by the pop-up
window of ICT.
1. Ensure that the generator is in a state where the reference must be set (for example
normal operation).
2. To start, select the Commissioning tab.
3. In the Reference impedance selection drop-down menu. select Reference 2.
4. To start reading the measurements, click the Start reading values from IED button in the
ICT toolbar.
69
ICT starts to read the selected viewed quantity from IED and plots values on the X/Y
graph.
Measured absolute Measured absolute

impedance Floating average of the impedance ± standard
measured absolute deviation
impedance
Reference Impedance
Selection dropdown
menu
GUID-FAE32C52-80F0-4AEF-AA0D-6BA39F896712 V1 EN-US
Figure 24: Commissioning tab

Normally continuous readings are performed and the read absolute impedance is viewed
in the plot.
By observing the standard deviation of the measured impedance, the commissioning
engineer can decide if the impedance of the generator is stable/settled, and also if the
average impedance is based on enough values so that statistically the signal noise is
“filtered out”. This results in a fairly accurate impedance measurement which can be used
as a second reference.
5. Click the Select button when the standard deviation has converged so that its magnitude
is within the noise level of the measured absolute impedance.
In the second commissioning sub tab, Step2 : Save Reference Impedance, the measured
real and imaginary reference 2 impedance is presented.
6. Select the Submit to Parameter setting button.
This forwards the newly acquired reference to Parameter setting.
7. Write the newly acquired real and imaginary parts of Reference 2 to IED.
7.6 Verifying calibration GUID-3805BA77-6369-4798-8E1B-1201A0B9C68A v3
After the calibration is performed, it is appropriate to verify that known faults are measured as
expected and that the function is indicating trips and alarms when it should, in other words
that the calibration was successful. For this purpose the monitoring feature can be used.
1. In the ICT toolbar, select the fourth tab, Monitoring.
70
Selectable quantity for

Currently used reference Selectable graph
plotting
update period
Currently measured
impedance and its
Logger feature
average
GUID-DCE099B6-4DBA-4A52-9566-0E20B8AF7712 V1 EN-US
Figure 25: Monitoring tab

2. Set the graph update period to one second by typing 1 into the Graph update period
field.
3. To start continuously plotting values on the graph with one second interval, select Start
reading values from IED.
By default the measured absolute impedance is plotted, however there are several items
that can be viewed when monitoring. To see these ones, select the available quantities
under the Viewed quantity drop-down menu under the Monitoring tab.
4. Observe the fault conductance while applying known faults.
Both the calibration factors and the reference that is used can be verified this way. In
some cases though, it is desired to be able to measure/view other quantities.
5. Select Fault conductance in the Viewed quantity drop-down menu.
The fault conductance is equal to 1/fault resistance, and is more suitable to view when no
faults or very high values of fault resistance are applied/measured.
Due to the fact that no fault theoretically equals infinite fault resistance and viewing this
only plots unreliable values, it is better to view the fault conductance, which is zero in this
case.
As no fault is applied, the measured fault conductance must be close to zero. Confirm
this by viewing the graph.
It may be necessary to zoom in or out to properly view the measurements. For
instructions on this, see Editing features in graph.
6. Apply for example 9kΩ fault resistance.
6.1. Make sure that it is correctly measured.
6.2. Try to change the Viewed quantity to Fault resistance in order to verify the value of
the applied test resistance.
You should be able to measure approximately 9kΩ here. If you choose to view fault
conductance, the measurement corresponds to approximately 1.11×10-4 Mho.
7. Apply another known fault, say 1kΏ and verify that it is measured correctly.
8. Apply a short circuit and monitor the measurement: the measured resistance shall be
close to 0Ω; the value of this measurement is an offset that will affect all performed
measurements. If this value deviates from zero more than 10% of the Trip setting, a new
calibration shall be performed with a better calibration resistance at the second step:
that may increase the accuracy of measurements.
9. When you are completely sure that the function measures correctly, stop the
measurements and remove any applied faults.
71
Previously it was verified that the function measures correctly by applying known faults
and observing the graph during monitoring. Besides measuring the fault size a trip
indication is required when a large fault is measured to prevent that a damage to the
generator occurs. To allow the specific function to issue a trip indication, it must first be
enabled:
9.1. Select the Enable Function Tripping button in the ICT toolbar.
9.2. Choose Yes in the pop-up message.
ICT now writes this to IED.
9.3. By default the trip level is set to 1kΩ. In other words, if the fault resistance is lower,
then the function issue trips.
10. Verify the measurements by applying various faults.
Trip indication shall be visible in the ICT toolbar.
11. Verify that TRIP and ALARM signals are connected to tripping/alarming/signaling/
communication in accordance with the scheme design.
It is very important that the Function Tripping is Enabled under the following
situations:
• After completion of the calibration step

• Before leaving the ICT Tool
7.7 Auditing GUID-70137BAD-6BD5-4835-964E-B6ADAE522A15 v1
During installations, calibrations and commissions the ICT generates reports for each of the
steps and collects them under the Auditing tab. See the procedures below on how to view and
delete reports as well as generate logs from reports.
1. To view the reports, go to the Auditing tab.
GUID-8348F60B-9BF5-4018-9740-0FA3371B0F9F V1 EN-US
Figure 26: Auditing tab

2. Open and view each report.
3. View reports in one of the following ways:
72
• In the short cut menu, right click and select View report.
• Click the View report button in the upper right corner of the auditing screen.
• Double click a report record.
4. Delete reports in one of the following ways:
• In the short cut menu, right click and select Delete report.
• Click the Delete report button in the upper right corner of the auditing screen.
• Select a record with the mouse cursor then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
5. Generate logs in one of the following ways:
• In the short cut menu, right click and select Generate log.
• Click the Generate log button.
Besides generating a report you can also generate a log file with the same information as
for the report. Open and see the details of the file in Notepad or MS Excel.
After a successful generation of the log, the system confirms with a message along with
the path of the log file.
7.8 Editing features in graph GUID-B2784230-2355-4D4A-AAF0-34864C8D3190 v2
You can do the following operations on the graph during calibration, commissioning and
monitoring:
• Zoom in
• Zoom out
• Cancel zoom
• Enable X-zooming
• Enable Y-zooming
1. Zoom in one of the following ways:

• Right click a graph and select Zoom in or Zoom out in the shortcut menu.
GUID-3F080E48-8B77-48A0-8283-89511E1AE50B V1 EN-US
Figure 27: Zooming via the shortcut menu

• Use the mouse to zoom in and select a part of the graph area.
73
GUID-261171B2-59CD-4248-B873-39A2BC3CD1F1 V1 EN-US
Figure 28: Zooming via area selection of a part of the graph

• Press PgUp key on the keyboard to zoom in and PgDn to zoom out.
2. Cancel a zoom in the following ways:

• Right click a graph and select Cancel Zoom in the shortcut menu.
The graph area is squeezed to the original size.
• Press Esc.
3. Enable X and Y zooming
• To enable and disable X zooming, right click the graph and select or deselect Enable
X zooming in the shortcut menu.
• To enable and disable Y zooming, right click the graph and select or deselect Enable
Y zooming in the shortcut menu.
7.9 Logging measurements to file GUID-C86EC2DF-88F0-4272-8988-583778B5F2AE v2
In addition to viewing online plotted data under the Monitoring tab, it is also possible to log
quantities to a file (tabbed text file) that can be viewed in the graph. Besides this voltage levels
measured by the function and also error codes are logged. This file can then be imported to
other tools for deeper analysis when needed. The logger feature is available on the lower right
corner of the Monitoring tab. Note that the logger is independent of graph plotting.
1. Select the Browse button.

See figure 15.
2. Navigate to a desired folder.
3. Type a suitable file name for the .txt file and select Save.
4. To start logging to this file, select the Start button.
ICT continuously logs data to this file with logging interval set under graph update
period. Notice that there is a field named Log period and its default value is 1 hour. The
period can be adjusted before the logging is started, if needed.
5. The logging can be stopped by selecting the Stop button.
6. You can open the file in notepad or MS Excel.
74
Establishing connection and verifying the SPA/IEC communication
Section 8 Establishing connection and

verifying the SPA/IEC
communication
8.1 Entering settings M11735-2 v1
If the IED is connected to a monitoring or control system via the rear SPA/IEC port, the
SPA/IEC port has to be set either for SPA or IEC use.
8.1.1 Entering SPA settings M11735-7 v4
The SPA/IEC port is located on the rear side of the IED. Two types of interfaces can be used:
• for plastic fibers with connector type HFBR

• for glass fibers with connectors type ST
When using the SPA protocol, the rear SPA/IEC port must be set for SPA use.
Procedure
1. Set the operation of the rear optical SPA/IEC port to “SPA”.

The operation of the rear SPA port can be found on the local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/Port configuration/SLM
optical serial port/PROTOCOL:1
When the setting is entered the IED restarts automatically. After the restart the SPA/IEC
port operates as a SPA port.
2. Set the slave number and baud rate for the rear SPA port
The slave number and baud rate can be found on the local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/SPA/SPA:1
Set the same slave number and baud rate as set in the SMS system for the IED.
8.1.2 Entering IEC settings M11735-32 v4
When using the IEC protocol, the rear SPA/IEC port must be set for IEC use.
Two types of interfaces can be used:
• for plastic fibers with connector type HFBR

• for glass fibers with connectors type ST
Procedure
1. Set the operation of the rear SPA/IEC port to “IEC”.

The operation of the rear SPA/IEC port can be found on the local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/SLM configuration/Rear optical SPA-IEC-DNP port/
PROTOCOL:1
75
When the setting is entered the IED restarts automatically. After the restart the selected
IEC port operates as an IEC port.
2. Set the slave number and baud rate for the rear IEC port.
The slave number and baud rate can be found on the local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/SLM configuration/Rear optical SPA-IEC-DNP port/
IEC60870–5–103
Set the same slave number and baud rate as set in the IEC master system for the IED.
8.2 Verifying the communication M11735-77 v1
To verify that the rear communication with the SMS/SCS system is working, there are some
different methods. Choose one of the following.
8.2.1 Verifying SPA communication M11735-81 v4
Procedure
1. Use a SPA-emulator and send “RF” to the IED. The answer from the IED should be the type
and version of it, for example, “REL670 2.1...”.
2. Generate one binary event by activating a function, which is configured to an event block
where the used input is set to generate events on SPA. The configuration must be made
with the PCM600 software. Verify that the event is presented in the SMS/SCS system.
During the following tests of the different functions in the IED, verify that the events and
indications in the SMS/SCS system are as expected.
8.2.2 Verifying IEC communication M11735-91 v2
To verify that the IEC communication with the IEC master system is working, there are some
different methods. Choose one of the following.
Procedure
1. Check that the master system time-out for response from the IED, for example after a
setting change, is > 40 seconds.
2. Use a protocol analyzer and record the communication between the IED and the IEC
master. Check in the protocol analyzer’s log that the IED answers the master messages.
3. Generate one binary event by activating a function that is configured to an event block
where the used input is set to generate events on IEC. The configuration must be made
with the PCM600 software. Verify that the event is presented in the IEC master system.
During the following tests of the different functions in the IED, verify that the events and
indications in the IEC master system are as expected.
8.3 fiber optic loop M11905-3 v5
The SPA communication is mainly used for SMS. It can include different numerical IEDs with
remote communication possibilities. The fiber optic loop can contain < 20-30 IEDs depending
on requirements on response time. Connection to a personal computer (PC) can be made
directly (if the PC is located in the substation) or by telephone modem through a telephone
network with ITU (CCITT) characteristics.
76
Table 9: Max distances between IEDs/nodes
glass < 1000 m according to optical budget

plastic < 25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget
8.4 Optical budget calculation for serial communication

with SPA/IEC M11736-4 v2
Table 10: Example

Distance 1 km Distance 25 m
Glass Plastic
Maximum attenuation - 11 dB - 7 dB
4 dB/km multi mode: 820 nm - 62.5/125 um 4 dB -
0.16 dB/m plastic: 620 nm - 1mm - 4 dB
Margins for installation, aging, and so on 5 dB 1 dB
Losses in connection box, two contacts (0.5 dB/ 1 dB -
contact)
Losses in connection box, two contacts (1 dB/ - 2 dB
contact)
Margin for 2 repair splices (0.5 dB/splice) 1 dB -
Maximum total attenuation 11 dB 7 dB
77
78
Establishing connection and verifying the LON communication

verifying the LON communication
9.1 Communication via the rear ports M12196-2 v1
9.1.1 LON communication M12196-4 v4
LON communication is normally used in substation automation systems. Optical fiber is used
within the substation as the physical communication link.
The test can only be carried out when the whole communication system is installed. Thus, the
test is a system test and is not dealt with here.
M14804-3 v3
Station HSI Control Center

MicroSCADA
Gateway
Star coupler
RER 111
IED IED IED
Figure 29: Example of LON communication structure for a substation automation

system
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IEDs through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from the
control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay horizontal communication.
The fiber optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fiber optic
cables.
79
Table 11: Specification of the fiber optic connectors

Glass fiber Plastic fiber
Cable connector ST-connector snap-in connector
Cable diameter 62.5/125 m 1 mm
Max. cable length 1000 m 10 m
Wavelength 820-900 nm 660 nm
Transmitted power -13 dBm (HFBR-1414) -13 dBm (HFBR-1521)
Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm (HFBR-2412) -20 dBm (HFBR-2521)
9.1.2 The LON Protocol M14804-32 v2
The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon
Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks and is a peer-
to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each
other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay communication, refer to the section
Multiple command function.
9.1.3 Hardware and software modules M14804-35 v4
The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application, but one
very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibers connecting the star coupler
to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from the MicroSCADA with Classic Monitor, application
library LIB520 is required.
The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB520 high-voltage process package,
which is a part of the Application Software Library in MicroSCADA applications.
The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in the IEDs. The module
contains a process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate a process database for the
control application in MicroSCADA.
When using MicroSCADA Monitor Pro instead of the Classic Monitor, SA LIB is used together
with 670 series Object Type files.
The HV Control 670 software module and 670 series Object Type files are used
with both 650 and 670 series IEDs.
Use the LON Network Tool (LNT) to set the LON communication. This is a software tool
applied as one node on the LON bus. To communicate via LON, the IEDs need to know
• The node addresses of the other connected IEDs.

• The network variable selectors to be used.
This is organized by LNT.
The node address is transferred to LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter
ServicePinMsg = Yes. The node address is sent to LNT via the LON bus, or LNT can scan the
network for new nodes.
The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can be
changed by LNT.
80
M11888-3 v4
The setting parameters for the LON communication are set via the local HMI. Refer to the
technical manual for setting parameters specifications.
The path to LON settings in the local HMI is Main menu/Configuration/Communication/SLM

configuration/Rear optical LON port
If the LON communication from the IED stops, caused by setting of illegal communication
parameters (outside the setting range) or by another disturbance, it is possible to reset the
LON port of the IED.
M11643-1 v3
Path in the local HMI under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/SLM configuration/
Rear optical LON port
These parameters can only be set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).
Table 12: Setting parameters for the LON communication

Parameter Range Default Unit Parameter description
DomainID 0 0 - Domain identification number
SubnetID* 0 - 255 0 - Subnet identification number
Step: 1
NodeID* 0 - 127 0 - Node identification number
Step: 1
*Can be viewed in the local HMI
Path in the local HMI under Main menu/Congifuration/Communication/SLM configuration/

These parameters can only be set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).
Table 13: LON node information parameters

Parameter Range Default Unit Parameter description
NeuronID* 0 - 12 Not loaded - Neuron hardware identification number in
hexadecimal code
Location 0-6 No value - Location of the node
*Can be viewed in the local HMI

Table 14: ADE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast

Table 15: LON commands

Command Command description
ServicePinMsg Command with confirmation. Transfers the node address to the LON Network Tool.
81
9.2 Optical budget calculation for serial communication

with LON M11737-4 v2
Table 16: Example

Distance 1 km Distance10 m
Glass Plastic
Maximum attenuation -11 dB - 7 dB
4 dB/km multi mode: 820 nm - 62.5/125 um 4 dB -
0.3 dB/m plastic: 620 nm - 1mm - 3 dB
Margins for installation, aging, and so on 5 dB 2 dB
Losses in connection box, two contacts (0.75 dB/contact) 1.5 dB -
Losses in connection box, two contacts (1dB/contact) - 2 dB
Margin for repair splices (0.5 dB/splice) 0.5 dB -
Maximum total attenuation 11 dB 7 dB
82
Establishing connection and verifying the IEC 61850 communication

verifying the IEC 61850
communication
10.1 Overview SEMOD172103-4 v6
The rear OEM ports are used for:
• process bus (IEC 61850-9-2LE) communication

• substation bus (IEC 61850-8-1) communication.
For IEC 61850-8-1 redundant communication, both rear OEM ports are utilized. In this case IEC
61850-9-2LE communication can not be used.
IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is not supported in the IED.
10.2 Setting the station communication SEMOD172108-3 v10
To enable IEC 61850 communication the corresponding OEM ports must be activated. The rear
OEM port AB and CD is used for IEC 61850-8-1 communication. For IEC 61850-8-1 redundant
communication, both OEM port AB and CD are used exclusively.
To enable IEC 61850 station communication:
1. Enable IEC 61850-8-1 (substation bus) communication for port AB.

1.1. Set values for the rear ports AB.
Navigate to: Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/
LANAB:1
Set values for Mode, IPAddress and IPMask. Mode must be set to Normal.
Check that the correct IP address is assigned to the port.
1.2. Enable IEC 61850-8-1 communication.
Navigate to: Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station communication/
IEC61850-8-1/IEC61850–8–1:1
Set Operation to On , PortSelGOOSE and PortSelMMS to the port used (for example
LANAB).
2. Enable redundant IEC 61850-8-1 communication for port AB and CD
2.1. Enable redundant communication.
Navigate to: Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/
PRP:1
Set values for Operation, IPAddress and IPMask. Operation must be set to On.
The IED will restart after confirmation. Menu items LANAB:1 and LANCD:1 are
hidden in local HMI after restart but are visible in PST where the values for
parameter Mode is set to Duo.
83
Establishing connection and verifying the IEC 61850 communication
10.3 Verifying the communication SEMOD172108-24 v8
To verify that the communication is working a test/analyzing tool, for example ITT600, can be used.
Verifying redundant IEC 61850-8-1 communication

Ensure that the IED receives IEC 61850-8-1 data on both port AB and CD. Browse in the local
HMI to Main menu/Diagnostics/Communication/Redundant PRP and check that both signals
LAN-A-STATUS and LAN-B-STATUS are shown as Ok. Remove the optical connection to one of
the ports AB or CD. Verify that either signal LAN-A-STATUS or LAN-B-STATUS (depending on
which connection that was removed) are shown as Error and the that other signal is shown as
Ok. Be sure to re-connect the removed connection after completed verification.
84
Testing IED operation
Section 11 Testing IED operation
11.1 Preparing for test IP336-1 v1
11.1.1 Requirements M11740-2 v8
IED test requirements:
• Calculated settings
• Application configuration diagram
• Signal matrix (SMT) configuration
• Terminal connection diagram
• Technical manual
• Three-phase test equipment
• PCM600
The setting and configuration of the IED must be completed before the testing can start.
The terminal diagram, available in the technical reference manual, is a general diagram of the
IED.
Note that the same diagram is not always applicable to each specific delivery
(especially for the configuration of all the binary inputs and outputs).
Therefore, before testing, check that the available terminal diagram corresponds to the IED.
The technical manual contains application and functionality summaries, function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per
function.
The test equipment should be able to provide a three-phase supply of voltages and currents.
The magnitude of voltage and current as well as the phase angle between voltage and current
must be variable. The voltages and currents from the test equipment must be obtained from
the same source and they must have minimal harmonic content. If the test equipment cannot
indicate the phase angle, a separate phase-angle measuring instrument is necessary.
Prepare the IED for test before testing a particular function. Consider the logic diagram of the
tested protection function when performing the test. All included functions in the IED are
tested according to the corresponding test instructions in this chapter. The functions can be
tested in any order according to user preferences. Only the functions that are used (Operation
is set to On) should be tested.
The response from a test can be viewed in different ways:
• Binary outputs signals

• Service values on the local HMI (logical signals or phasors)
• A PC with PCM600 application configuration software in work online mode
All setting groups that are used should be tested.
85
This IED is designed for a maximum continuous current of four times the rated
current.
Please observe the measuring accuracy of the IED, the test equipment and the
angular accuracy for both of them.
Please consider the configured logic from the function block to the output
contacts when measuring the operate time.
After intense testing, it is important that the IED is not immediately restarted,
which might cause a faulty trip due to flash memory restrictions. Some time
must pass before the IED is restarted. For more information about the flash
memory, refer to section “Configuring the IED and changing settings”.
11.1.2 Preparing the IED to verify settings M11741-2 v11
If a test switch is included, start preparation by making the necessary connections to the test
switch. This means connecting the test equipment according to a specific and designated IED
terminal diagram.
Put the IED into the test mode to facilitate the test of individual functions and prevent
unwanted operation caused by other functions. The busbar differential protection is not
included in the test mode and is not prevented to operate during the test operations. The test
switch should then be connected to the IED.
Verify that analog input signals from the analog input module are measured and recorded
correctly by injecting currents and voltages required by the specific IED.
To make testing even more effective, use PCM600. PCM600 includes the Signal monitoring
tool, which is useful in reading the individual currents and voltages, their amplitudes and
phase angles. In addition, PCM600 contains the Disturbance handling tool. The content of
reports generated by the Disturbance handling tool can be configured which makes the work
more efficient. For example, the tool may be configured to only show time tagged events and
to exclude analog information and so on.
Check the disturbance report settings to ensure that the indications are correct.
For information about the functions to test, for example signal or parameter names, see the
technical manual. The correct initiation of the disturbance recorder is made on start and/or
release or trip from a function. Also check that the wanted recordings of analog (real and
calculated) and binary signals are achieved.
Parameters can be entered into different setting groups. Make sure to test
functions for the same parameter setting group. If needed, repeat the tests for
all different setting groups used. The difference between testing the first
parameter setting group and the remaining is that there is no need for testing
the connections.
During testing, observe that the right testing method, that corresponds to the actual
parameters set in the activated parameter setting group, is used.
86
Set and configure the function(s) before testing. Most functions are highly flexible and permit
a choice of functional and tripping modes. The various modes are checked at the factory as
part of the design verification. In certain cases, only modes with a high probability of coming
into operation need to be checked when commissioned to verify the configuration and
settings.
11.2 Activating the test mode M11412-2 v12
Put the IED into the test mode before testing. The test mode blocks all protection functions
and some of the control functions in the IED, and the individual functions to be tested can be
unblocked to prevent unwanted operation caused by other functions. In this way, it is possible
to test slower back-up measuring functions without the interference from faster measuring
functions. The test switch should then be connected to the IED.Test mode is indicated when
the yellow StartLED flashes.
1. Browse to the TestMode menu and press E.

The TestMode menu is found on the local HMI under Main menu/Test/IED test mode/
TestMode
2. Use the up and down arrows to choose On and press E.
3. Press the left arrow to exit the menu.
The dialog box Save changes appears.
4. Choose Yes, press E and exit the menu.
The yellow startLED above the LCD will start flashing when the IED is in test mode.
11.3 Preparing the connection to the test equipment M11743-2 v8
The IED can be equipped with a test switch of type RTXP8, RTXP18 or RTXP24. The test switch
and its associated test plug handle (RTXH8, RTXH18 or RTXH24) are a part of the COMBITEST
system, which provides secure and convenient testing of the IED.
When using the COMBITEST, preparations for testing are automatically carried out in the
proper sequence, that is, for example, blocking of tripping circuits, short circuiting of CTs,
opening of voltage circuits, making IED terminals available for secondary injection. Terminals 1
and 8, 1 and 18 as well as 1 and 12 of the test switches RTXP8, RTXP18 and RTXP24 respectively
are not disconnected as they supply DC power to the protection IED.
The RTXH test-plug handle leads may be connected to any type of test equipment or
instrument. When a number of protection IEDs of the same type are tested, the test-plug
handle only needs to be moved from the test switch of one protection IED to the test switch of
the other, without altering the previous connections.
Use COMBITEST test system to prevent unwanted tripping when the handle is withdrawn,
since latches on the handle secure it in the half withdrawn position. In this position, all
voltages and currents are restored and any re-energizing transients are given a chance to
decay before the trip circuits are restored. When the latches are released, the handle can be
completely withdrawn from the test switch, restoring the trip circuits to the protection IED.
If a test switch is not used, perform measurement according to the provided circuit diagrams.
Never disconnect the secondary connection of a current transformer circuit

without first short-circuiting the transformer's secondary winding. Operating a
potential build up that may damage the transformer and cause personal injury.
87
11.4 Connecting the test equipment to the IED M11744-2 v7
Connect the test equipment according to the IED specific connection diagram and the needed
input and output signals for the function under test. An example of a connection is shown in
figure 30.
Connect the current and voltage terminals. Pay attention to the current polarity. Make sure
that the connection of input and output current terminals and the connection of the residual
current conductor is correct. Check that the input and output logical signals in the logic
diagram for the function under test are connected to the corresponding binary inputs and
outputs of the IED under test.
To ensure correct results, make sure that the IED as well as the test equipment
are properly earthed before testing.
IL1 IL1
IL2 IL2
IL3 IL3
IN IN (I4,I5)
Test equipment
UL1 UL1
UL2
IED
UL2
UL3 UL3
UN UN
UN (U4,U5)
TRIP L1
TRIP L2
TRIP L3
IEC 61850
Figure 30: Connection example of the test equipment to the IED when test equipment is
connected to the transformer input module
11.5 Releasing the function to be tested M11413-2 v6
Release or unblock the function to be tested. This is done to ensure that only the function or
the chain of functions to be tested are in operation and that other functions are prevented
from operating. Release the tested function(s) by setting the corresponding Blocked
parameter under Function test modes to No in the local HMI.
When testing a function in this blocking feature, remember that not only the actual function
must be activated, but the whole sequence of interconnected functions (from measuring
inputs to binary output contacts), including logic must be activated. Before starting a new test
mode session, scroll through every function to ensure that only the function to be tested (and
the interconnected ones) have the parameters Blocked and eventually EvDisable set to No and
Yes respectively. Remember that a function is also blocked if the BLOCK input signal on the
corresponding function block is active, which depends on the configuration. Ensure that the
logical status of the BLOCK input signal is equal to 0 for the function to be tested. Event
88
function blocks can also be individually blocked to ensure that no events are reported to a
remote station during the test. This is done by setting the parameter EvDisable to Yes.
Any function is blocked if the corresponding setting in the local HMI under Main
menu/Test/Function test modes menu remains On, that is, the parameter
Blocked is set to Yes and the parameter TestMode under Main menu/Test/IED
test mode remains active. All functions that were blocked or released in a
previous test mode session, that is, the parameter Test mode is set to On, are
reset when a new test mode session is started.
Procedure
1. Click the Function test modes menu.

The Function test modes menu is located in the local HMI under Main menu/Test/
Function test modes.
2. Browse to the function instance that needs to be released.
3. Set parameter Blocked for the selected function to No.
11.6 Verifying analog primary and secondary measurement M11745-2 v13
Verify that the connections are correct and that measuring and scaling is done correctly. This
is done by injecting current and voltage to the IED.
Besides verifying analog input values from the merging unit via the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
process bus, analog values from the transformer input module can be verified as follows.
Apply input signals as needed according to the actual hardware and the
application configuration.
1. Inject a symmetrical three-phase voltage and current at rated value.

2. Compare the injected value with the measured values.
The voltage and current phasor menu in the local HMI is located under Main menu/
Measurements/Analog primary values and Main menu/Measurements/Analog
secondary values.
3. Compare the frequency reading with the set frequency and the direction of the power.
The frequency and active power are located under Main menu/Measurements/
Monitoring/ServiceValues(MMXN)/CVMMXN:x. Then navigate to the bottom of the list
to find the frequency.
4. Inject an unsymmetrical three-phase voltage and current, to verify that phases are
correctly connected.
If some setting deviates, check the analog input settings under
Main menu/Configuration/Analog modules
11.7 Testing the protection functionality GUID-125B6F28-D3E5-4535-9CD6-6C056B79F496 v2
Each protection function must be tested individually by secondary injection.
89
• Verify operating levels (trip) and timers.

• Verify alarm and blocking signals.
• Use the disturbance handling tool in PCM600 to evaluate that the protection function has
received the correct data and responded correctly (signaling and timing).
• Use the event viewer tool in PCM600 to check that only expected events have occurred.
11.8 Forcing of binary I/O signals for testing
11.8.1 Forcing concept GUID-3FD8C676-10E5-432A-8CD5-4643299AD794 v1
Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way to test wiring in substations as well
as testing configuration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that all binary inputs and outputs
on the IED I/O modules (BOM, BIM, IOM & SOM) can be set to a value (i.e active or not-active),
selected by the user, while the IED is in test mode. For inputs, this is true regardless of the
actual signal voltage present on the input. For outputs, any output relay can be forced to be
active or not, regardless of the current requested state of the output in the IED logic
configuration.
Be observant that forcing of binary inputs and outputs on an IED, with

inappropriate setup, can result in potential danger.
11.8.2 How to enable forcing GUID-50280F59-A98C-4E48-AB6D-2B4C138943DD v1
To enable forcing, the IED must first be put into IED test mode. While the IED is not in test
mode, the LHMI/PCM600 menus that relate to forcing will not have any effect on the input/
output status due to safety reasons.
11.8.2.1 Enable forcing by using LHMI GUID-41F7C636-75BC-42EF-A955-4BD9E347619E v1
1. Enable IED Testmode by setting IEDTestMode to On under Main menu/Test/IED test

mode TESTMODE:1.
2. Exit back to the root menu.

3. Select Yes in the save dialogue box.
Once the IED is in test mode the yellow Start LED starts to blink.
90
11.8.2.2 Enable forcing using TESTMODE function block GUID-DD17B7D6-516F-4561-9D30-906B968EAFE0 v1
• Use the TESTMODE function block, appropriately configured in PCM600/ACT.
It may be convenient to control the input on mentioned component from, for example, an LHMI
function key or similar during commissioning to quickly and easily enter IED test mode.
11.8.3 How to change binary input/output signals using forcing GUID-7DF9FAF1-68B1-49AF-9DE4-2A8D6F6FAEFE v1
Once the IED is in IED test mode, the LHMI/PCM600 menus can be used to control input/
output signals freely.
11.8.3.1 Forcing by using LHMI GUID-D885671F-79E5-4B75-8777-B59E44F6FCFC v1
Editing a signal value directly GUID-E0C115BE-3AD1-48C7-BA2D-29857CD3D3ED v1
• Edit the input/output value directly to select the desired logical level, by doing following:
1. Select the value line of the desired signal, see figure 31.
2. Press the Enter key to edit the value.
Figure 31: Value line of the desired signal

3. Use the up/down arrows on the LHMI to change the signal value or the appropriate
menu in PCM600.
The status of the signal changes automatically to Forced (i.e. there is no need to set
the status to Forced manually).
On the LHMI, these edit changes have immediate effect. This means that the
value changes directly when the up/down arrow is pressed (i.e. there is no need
to press the Enter key to effectuate the change).
When navigating away from a LHMI forcing menu for an I/O board, the user is prompted to
either leave the signals forced, or to revert all of them back to the unforced state.
91
It is possible to power-cycle the IED in this state without losing the forcing
states and values. This means that once a signal is forced, and the IED remains
in IED test mode, the input or output will appear “frozen” at the value selected
by the user, even if the IED is switched off and back on again.
Freezing a signal value without changing it GUID-FD76AAC1-7098-47D3-A3A1-6ACDF509ED91 v1
• Set the status of a signal to Forced, in the forcing menu that corresponds to the I/O card
in question. See example of LHMI menu in figure 32
Figure 32: Example of LHMI menu using BIM3
The signal “freezes” and will not change value even if, for example, a binary input signal voltage
changes level, or if a binary output is activated as the result of a protection function block
activating.
11.8.3.2 Forcing by using PCM600 GUID-E9D0DAE6-7A86-4FF9-943E-42039015D05B v1
In PCM600 the concept is a bit different compared to LHMI. The forcing is accomplished by
entering a forcing session. Within such a session, multiple signals on multiple I/O boards may
be edited and changed at the same time and has no effect on the IED. Once the user is
satisfied with the forcing setup, then all the changes can be effectuated simultaneously
towards the IED, potentially changing inputs and outputs on multiple I/O boards at the same
time. It is also possible to abort this operation (described in step 6 below) and to undo all
forcing.
92
1. Right click on the IED in the plant structure and select Signal Monitoring.
2. Click on the List View tab.
3. Click Forcing Session in the menu IED/Start Forcing.
4. Click Start editing signal value for forcing on the tool bar.
The Signal Monitoring menu changes and indicates the forcing values that can be edited.
5. Select and edit the values.

6. Click Acknowledge and send.
This commits the values to the IED and exits the editing session.
7. Click Cancel to abort the changes and revert back to actual IED values.
93
Regardless if the forcing changes are commited or canceled, the forcing is still
active.
To force more signals, click the button Start editing signal value for forcing again.
11.8.4 How to undo forcing changes and return the IED to normal
operation GUID-00E2BAD8-A29E-4B9D-80E6-E12F59E019BD v1
Regardless of which input/output signals have been forced, all forced signals will return to
their normal states immediately when the IED is taken out of test mode.
When the forcing is removed by exiting from IED test mode, both input and
output signals may change values. This means that logic input signals may
activate functions in the IED and that output relays may change state, which
can be potentially dangerous.
11.8.4.1 Undo forcing by using TestMode component GUID-CA5CCA57-DFFF-4362-AC1D-08738D2BA45F v1
• If the IED test mode was entered through the test mode function block:
1. Deactivate the control input on that block.
This immediately undoes all forcing, regardless of how it was accomplished and disabled
all the way to force signals.
11.8.4.2 Undo forcing by using LHMI GUID-55199606-E70D-49B1-885D-251700FB562B v1
• If the IED test mode was enabled to using the LHMI:

1. Set IEDTestMode to Off in the LHMI menu.
2. Exit from the menu and click Yes in the Save dialogue box.
This immediately undoes all forcing, regardless of how it was accomplished and disabled.
11.8.4.3 Undo forcing by using PCM600 GUID-CE7FD186-99FC-41C8-910F-894A57037777 v1
1. Uncheck Forcing Session under the menu IED.
2. Click Yes in the confirmation dialogue box.
94
PCM600 will revert all forced signals back to unforced and the real signal values will
immediately take effect again.
This may change both binary input values and output relay states and will undo
any forcing done by using the LHMI.
If the IED is left in test mode, then it is still possible to perform new forcing
operations, both from LHMI and from PCM600
95
96
Testing functionality by secondary injection
Section 12 Testing functionality by secondary

injection
12.1 Testing disturbance report
12.1.1 Introduction M17101-2 v6
The following sub-functions are included in the disturbance report function:
• Disturbance recorder
• Event list
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Indications
If the disturbance report is set on, then its sub-functions are also set up and so it is not
possible to only switch these sub-functions off. The disturbance report function is switched
off (parameter Operation = Off) in PCM600 or the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
Settings/Monitoring/Disturbance report/DRPRDRE:1.
12.1.2 Disturbance report settings M11746-2 v6
When the IED is in test mode, the disturbance report can be made active or inactive. If the
disturbance recorder is turned on during test mode, recordings will be made. When test mode
is switched off all recordings made during the test session are cleared.
Setting OpModeTest for the control of the disturbance recorder during test mode are located
on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Monitoring/Disturbance report/
DRPRDRE:1.
12.1.3 Disturbance recorder (DR) M11750-2 v6
A Manual Trig can be started at any time. This results in a recording of the actual values from
all recorded channels.
The Manual Trig can be started in two ways:
1. From the local HMI under Main menu/Disturbance records.

1.1. Enter on the row at the bottom of the HMI called Manual trig.
A new recording begins. The view is updated if you leave the menu and return.
1.2. Navigate to General information or to Trip values to obtain more detailed
information.
2. Open the Disturbance handling tool for the IED in the plant structure in PCM600.
2.1. Right-click and select Execute manual Trig in the window Available recordings in IED.
2.2. Read the required recordings from the IED.
2.3. Refresh the window Recordings and select a recording.
2.4. Right-click and select Create Report or Open With to export the recordings to any
disturbance analyzing tool that can handle Comtrade formatted files.
97
Evaluation of the results from the disturbance recording function requires access to a PC
either permanently connected to the IED or temporarily connected to the Ethernet port (RJ-45)
on the front. The PCM600 software package must be installed in the PC.
Disturbance upload can be performed by the use of PCM600 or by any third party tool with IEC
61850 protocol. Reports can automatically be generated from PCM600. Disturbance files can
be analyzed by any tool reading Comtrade formatted disturbance files.
It could be useful to have a printer for hard copies. The correct start criteria and behavior of
the disturbance recording function can be checked when IED protective functions are tested.
When the IED is brought into normal service it is recommended to delete all recordings, made
during commissioning to avoid confusion in future fault analysis.
All recordings in the IED can be deleted in two ways:
1. in the local HMI under Main menu/Clear/Reset disturbances, or

2. in the Disturbance handling tool in PCM600 by selecting Delete all recordings in the IED...
in the window Available Recordings in IED.
12.1.4 Event recorder (ER) and Event list (EL) M12645-2 v6
The result from the event recorder and event list can be viewed on the local HMI or, after
upload, in PCM600 as follows:
1. on the local HMI under Main menu/Events, or in more details via

2. the Event Viewer in PCM600.
The internal FIFO register of all events will appear when the event viewer is launched.
When the IED is brought into normal service it is recommended to delete all events resulting
from commissioning tests to avoid confusion in future fault analysis. All events in the IED can
be cleared in the local HMI under Main Menu//Clear/Clear internal event list or Main menu/
Clear/Clear process event list. It is not possible to clear the event lists from PCM600.
When testing binary inputs, the event list (EL) might be used instead. No uploading or
analyzing of registrations is then needed since the event list keeps running, independent of
start of disturbance registration.
12.2 Identifying the function to test in the technical

reference manual M11748-2 v4
Use the technical manual to identify function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,
setting parameters and technical data.
12.3 Differential protection IP10805-1 v1
12.3.1 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF SEMOD54284-49 v7
Prepare the IED for verification of settings outlined in section "Requirements" and section "Preparing
for test" in this chapter.
98
12.3.1.1 Verifying the settings SEMOD54284-51 v10
1. Go to Main menu/Test/Function test modes/Differential protection and make sure that

the restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF is set to Off and
that the four step residual overcurrent function EF4PTOC under Main menu/Test/
Function test modes/Current protection is set to Off, since they are configured to the
same current transformer inputs as the transformer differential protection. Make sure
that the transformer differential functions T2WPDIF or T3WPDIF are unblocked.
2. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase currents to the current terminals of the
IED, which are connected to the CTs on the HV side of the power transformer.
3. Increase the current in phase L1 until the protection function operates and note the
operating current.
4. Check that the trip and alarm contacts operate according to the configuration logic.
5. Decrease the current slowly from operate value and note the reset value.
Depending on the power transformer vector group (Yd and so on), the single-phase
injection current may appear as differential current in one or two phases and the
operating value of the injected single-phase current will be different.
6. Check in the same way the function by injecting current in phases L2 and L3 respectively.
7. Inject a symmetrical three-phase current and note the operate value.
8. Connect the timer and set the current to twice the operate value.
9. Switch on the current and note the operate time.
10. Check in the same way the measuring circuits connected to the CTs on the LV side and
other current inputs to the transformer differential protection.
11. Finally check that trip information is stored in the event menu.
Information on how to use the event menu is found in the operator’s

manual.
12. If available on the test set, a second harmonic current of about 20% (assumes 15%
setting on I1/I2 ratio parameter) can be added to the fundamental frequency in phase L1.
Increase the current in phase L1 above the start value measured in step 6. Repeat test
with current injection in phases L2 and L3 respectively.
The balancing of currents flowing into and out of the differential zone is checked by
primary injection testing, see section "Requirements" and section "Preparing for test" in
this chapter.
Fifth harmonic blocking can be tested in a similar way.
For more detailed formulas please refer to the application manual.
12.3.1.2 Completing the test SEMOD54284-86 v5
Continue to test another function or end the test by changing the TestMode setting to Off.
Restore connections and settings to their original values, if they were changed for testing
purposes.
12.3.2 High impedance differential protection HZPDIF SEMOD55257-42 v3
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section "Requirements" and
section "Preparing for test" in this chapter.
99
1. Connect single-phase or three-phase test set to inject the operating voltage. The
injection is done across the measuring branch.
The required trip and alarm voltage, as well as the used stabilizing
resistance value must be set in the function. Note as well that used CT
input in the IED must have ratio set as 1:1. This is essential for the
measurement of the expected value. Normally a slightly higher operating
value is no problem as the sensitivity is not influenced much.
2. Increase the voltage and make note of the operate value U>Trip. This is done by manual
testing and without trip of the test set.
3. Connect the trip contact to the test set to stop the test set for measurement of trip
times below.
4. Reduce the voltage slowly and make note of the reset value. The reset value must be high
for this function.
5. Check the operating time by injecting a voltage corresponding to 1.2 ˣ U>Trip level. Make
note of the measured trip time.
6. If required, verify the trip time at another voltage. Normally 2 ˣ U>Trip is selected.
7. If used, measure the alarm level operating value. Increase the voltage and make note of
the operate value U>Alarm. This is done with manual test and without trip of the test set.
8. Measure the operating time on the alarm output by connecting the stop of the test set to
an output from tAlarm. Inject a voltage 1.2 ˣ U>Alarm and measure the alarm time.
9. Check that trip and alarm outputs operate according to the configuration logic.
10. Finally check that start and alarm information is stored in the event menu and if a serial
connection to the SA is available verify that the correct and only the required signals are
presented on the local HMI and on the SCADA system.
Information on how to use the event menu is found in the operator's manual.
purposes.
12.3.3 Generator differential protection GENPDIF SEMOD155702-45 v4
Prepare the IED for verification of settings outlined in section

"Requirements" and section "Preparing for test" in this chapter.
12.3.3.1
Verifying the settings
SEMOD155702-49 v4
1. Go to Main menu/Test/Function test modes/Differential protection and make sure all

other functions, configured to the same current transformer inputs as the generator
differential protection, are set off. Make sure that the generator differential function is
unblocked.
2. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase current to the current IEDs, which are
connected to the CTs on the HV side of the generator.
3. Increase the current in phase L1 until the protection function operates and note the
operating current.
4. Check that trip and alarm contacts operate according to the configuration logic.
100
6. Check in the same way the function by injecting current in phases L2 and L3.
7. Inject a symmetrical three-phase current and note the operate value.
8. Connect the timer and set the current to twice the operate value.
10. Check in the same way the functioning of the measuring circuits connected to the CTs on
the neutral point side of the generator.
11. Finally check that trip information is stored in the event menu.
Information on how to use the event menu is found in the operator’s

manual.
12. If available on the test set a second-harmonic current of about 20% (assumes 15%
setting on I1/I2 ratio parameter) can be added to the fundamental tone in phase L1.
Increase the current in phase L1 above the start value measured in step 3. Repeat test
with current injection in phases L2 and L3 respectively.
Fifth-harmonic blocking can be tested in a similar way.
The balancing of currents flowing into and out of the differential zone is typically checked
by primary testing.
purposes.
12.3.4 Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF SEMOD55252-82 v7
1. Connect the test set for single-phase current injection to the protection terminals
connected to the CT in the power transformer neutral-to-earth circuit.
2. Increase the injection current and note the operating value of the protection function.
3. Check that all trip and start contacts operate according to the configuration logic.
5. Connect the timer and set the current to ten times the value of the IDMin setting.
7. Connect the test set to terminal L1 and neutral of the three-phase current input
configured to REFPDIF. Also inject a current higher than half the Idmin setting in the
neutral-to-earth circuit with the same phase angle and with polarity corresponding to an
internal fault.
8. Increase the current injected in L1, and note the operate value. Decrease the current
slowly and note the reset value.
9. Inject current into terminals L2 and L3 in the same way as in step 7 above and note the
operate and reset values.
10. Inject a current equal to 10% of rated current into terminal L1.
11. Inject a current in the neutral-to-earth circuit with the same phase angle and with polarity
corresponding to an external fault.
12. Increase the current to five times the operating value and check that the protection does
not operate.
13. Finally check that trip information is stored in the event and disturbance recorder.
101
purposes.
12.4 Impedance protection SEMOD53525-1 v2
12.4.1 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic

ZMQPDIS GUID-AF589812-9034-4DA4-B081-E3ACBA947058 v9
Prepare the IED for verification of settings outlined in section "Requirements" and section
"Preparing for test" in this chapter.
Measure operating characteristics during constant current conditions. Keep the measured
current as close as possible to its rated value or lower. But make sure it is higher than the set
minimum operating current.
Ensure that the maximum continuous current to the IED does not exceed four times its rated
value, if the measurement of the operating characteristics runs under constant voltage
conditions.
The test procedure has to take into consideration that the shaped load encroachment
characteristic is active. It is therefore necessary to check the setting. To verify the settings
with the shaped load encroachment characteristic the test should be carried out according to
figures 33 and 34 and tables 17 and 18. In cases where the load encroachment characteristic is
activated tests according to the adjusted figures should be carried out.
To verify the settings for the operating points according to the following fault types should be
tested:
• One phase-to-phase fault
• One phase-to-earth fault
The shape of the operating characteristic depends on the values of the setting parameters.
The figures illustrating the characteristic for the distance protection function
can be used for settings with and without load encroachment. The solid lines
designate the diagram applicable when the load current compensation is
active. The solid line and all test points except 13 are valid for this case.
When the load current compensation is inactive, the dotted lines and test point
13 are valid. Test points 5, 6, and 7 are not valid for this measurement.
102
1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1 10 4
12
120° D
a 5 A rgL
6 b=
R (Ohm/phase)
7 13
9 c 20°
8
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
0.5 x RFPP
IEC05000368-3-en
Figure 33: Distance protection characteristic with test points for phase-to-phase
measurements
Table 17: Test points for phase-to-phase loops L1-L2 (Ohm/Loop)

Test point Reach Set value Comments
1 X X1set
R 0
2 X X1set
R R1set
3 X 0.8 x X1set
R 0.8 x R1set+ RFPP/2
4 X 0.5 x X1set
5 X 0.85 x RFPP x tan (ArgRLd) ArgLd = angle for the maximal load transfer
R 0.85 x RFPP
6 X RLdFw x tan (ArgLd)
R RLdFw
7 X 0
R RLdFw
8 X –0.2143 x RFPP/2 Exact: 0.8 x RFPP/2 (ArgDir=20°)
R 0.8 x RFPP/2
9 X –0.4 x RLdFw x tan(ArgDir=20°)
R 0.4 x RLdFw
10 X 0.5 x X1set Exact –0.5 x R1set x tan(ArgNegRes=30°)
R –0.23 x X1set
R –0.37 x X1 set
103

12 X 0.5 x X1set
R 0.5 x R1set
13 X 0 Only used when RLdFw > 0.5 x RFPP

R 0.5 x RFPP
Table 17 is used in conjunction with figure 33.
1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1+XN 10 4
12
5 D
a
120°
A rgL
6 b=
R (Ohm/loop)
7 13
9 20°
8
c
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
alt. 80% of
RFPE
RFPE (Load
encroachment)
Figure 34: Distance protection characteristic with test points for phase-to-earth
measurements
Table 18: Test points for phase-to-earth L3-E (Ohm/Loop)

Test point Reach Value Comments
1 X (2 x X1set+X0set)/3
R 0
2 X (2 x X1set+ X0set)/3
R 2 x R1set+ R0set)/3
3 X 0.8 x (2 x X1set+ X0set)/3
R 0.8 x (2 x R1set+ R0set)/3

+RFPEset
4 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set+ R0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set+R0set)/3 +
RFPEset
5 X 0.85 x RFPEset x tan(ArgLdset) ArgLd = angle for the maximal load transfer
R 0.85 x RFPE
6 X RLdFwset x tan(ArgLdSet)
R RLdFwset
104

7 X 0
R RLdFwset
8 X –0.1072 x RLdFwset Exact: 0.4 x RFPE x tan (ArgDir=20°)
R 0.4 x RLdFwset
9 X –0.8 x RLdFwset x
tan(ArgDir=20°)
R 0.8 x RLdFwset
10 X 0.17 x (2 x X1set + X0 set) Exact: 0.5 x (2 x X1set X0 set)/3
R -0.36 x (2 x X1set + X0set) Exact: 0.5 x (2X1set + X0set)/(3 x

tan(AgNegDir=30°)
11 X 0.27 x (2 x X1set+X0set) Exact: 0.8 x (2 x X1set + X0set)/3
R –0.57 x (2 x X1set + X0set) Exact: 0.8 x (2X1set + X0set)/(3 x

tan(AgNegDir=30°)
12 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set + X0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set + R0set)/3
13 X 0 Only used when RLdFw > RFPE

R RFPE
12.4.1.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values M14944-126 v8
Procedure:
1. Subject the IED to healthy normal load conditions for at least two seconds.
2. Apply the fault condition and slowly decrease the measured impedance to find the
operating value of the phase-to-phase fault for zone 1 according to test point 1 in
figure 33 and table 17. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operating value for test points 2, 3 in table 17.
Observe that the zones that are not tested have to be blocked and the zone that is tested
has to be released.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to find the operating value for the phase-to-earth fault L3–E
according to figure 34 and table 18.
Test points 8, 9. 10 and 11 are intended to test the directional lines of

impedance protection. Since directionality is a common function for all 5
measuring zones, it is only necessary to test points 8, 9. 10 and 11 once in
the forward direction in order to test the accuracy of directionality
(directional angles). Directional functionality testing (trip inside, no-trip
outside) should always be made for all impedance zones set with
directionality (forward or reverse).
12.4.1.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones M14944-154 v6
Procedure:
105
2. Apply the fault condition to find the operating time for the phase-to-phase fault
according to test point 12 in figure 33 and table 17 for zone 1. Compare the result of the
measurement with the setting t1PP.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operating time for the phase-to-earth fault according to
test point 12 in figure 34 and table 18. Compare the result of the measurement with the
setting t1PE.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to find the operating time for all other used measuring zones.
has to be released.
12.4.1.3 Completing the test M14944-167 v3
purposes.
12.4.2 Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral

characteristic FDPSPDIS M13906-3 v9
Prepare the IED for verification of settings outlined in section "Requirements" and
The phase selectors operate on the same measuring principles as the impedance measuring
zones. So it is necessary to follow the same principles as for distance protection, when
performing the secondary injection tests.
current as close as possible to the rated value of its associated input transformer, or lower.
But ensure that it is higher than the set minimum operating current.
conditions.
To verify the settings the operating points according to figures 35 and 36 should be tested.
See also tables 19 and 20 for information.
106
X ( W / loop)
4 85% 3
( X 1 + XN ) 5
ArgNegRes 60°
2 R ( W / loop)
7
6
50% of RLdFw
RFFwPE IEC09000734-4-en.vsd
Figure 35: Operating characteristic for phase selection function, forward direction
single-phase faults
Table 19: Test points for phase-to-earth loop L3-E (Ohm/loop)

1 X [X1+XN] XN=(X0-X1)/3
R 0
2 X 0
R RLdFw When RLdFW < RFFwPE
R RFFwPE When RLdFwPE > RFFwPE
3 X 0.85·[X1+XN] R≈0.491·(X1+XN)+RFFwPE
R 0.85·[X1+XN]·1/tan(60°)+RFFwPE
4 X 0.85·[X1+XN] Can be limited by RFFwPE
R -0.85·[X1+XN]·
tan (AngNegRes-90°)
5 X RFFwPE·tan (ArgLd) Only when RLdFw < RFFwPE
R RFFwPE
6 X -0.5·RLdFw·tan (ArgDir)
R 0.5·RLdFw
Table 19 is used together with figure 35.
107
X ( W / phase)
4 85% 3
X1 ArgLd
5
ArgNegRes
60°
2
R ( W / phase)
6 7
ArgDir
50% RLdFw
0.5·RFFwPP IEC09000735-3-en.vsd
phase-to-phase faults
Table 20: Test points for phase-to-phase loops L1–L2 (Ohm/phase)

1 X X1
R 0
2 X 0
R RLdFw When RLdFw < 0,5·RFFwPP
R 0,5·RFFwPP When RLdFw > 0,5·RFFwPP
3 X 0.85·X1 R=0.491·X1+0.5 RFFwPP
R 0.85·X1·1/tan(60°)+0.5 RFFwPP
4 X 0.85·X1 Can be limited by RFFwPP
R -0.85·X1·tan (AngNegRes-90°)
5 X 0.5·RFFwPP·tan (ArgLd) Only when RLdFW < RFFwPP
R 0.5·RFFwPP
R 0.5·RLdFw
Table 20 is used together with figure 36.
12.4.2.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values M13906-73 v6
Procedure:
108
1. Supply the IED with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.
operate value for of the phase-to-earth loop L3, test point 1, according to figure 35.
Compare the result of the measurement with the expected value according to table 19.
The corresponding binary signals that inform about the operation of the phase selection
measuring elements are available in the local HMI under
Main menu/Test/Function status/Impedance Protection/PhaseSelection(PDIS, 21)/
FDPSPDIS:x.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operate values for the remaining test points according to
figure 35 and table 19.
When the load encroachment characteristic is deliberately set very high in

order not to have an influence, then the test points 2 and 5 can be
replaced by test point 7.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to find the operate value for the phase-to-phase fault in L1 — L2
purposes.
12.4.3 Full scheme distance protection, mho characteristic ZMHPDIS M14944-3 v10
Consider releasing of the zone to be tested by setting the phase selector FMPSPDIS to On .
Keep the current constant when measuring operating characteristics. Keep the current as
close as possible to its rated value or lower. But make sure it is higher than the set minimum
operating current.
Ensure that the maximum continuous current in an IED does not exceed four times its rated
conditions.
To verify the mho characteristic, at least two points should be tested.
In the following, three test points are proposed. The mho characteristic always goes through
the origin, which automatically gives a fourth point for the characteristic.
109
12.4.3.1 Phase-to-phase faults M14944-292 v8
X 1
ZPP
3 2
50%
ZAngPP R Ohm/phase
Figure 37: Proposed test points for phase-to-phase fault
Table 21: Test points for phase-to-phase (ohms / phase)

Test reach Value Comments
points
1 X ZPP · sin(ZAngPP)
R ZPP · sin(ZAngPP)
2 X 0,5· (ZPP· sin(ZAngPP)
R 0,5·ZPP + ΔR = 0,5·ZPP·(1+cos(ZAngPP))
3 X 0,5·ZPP·sin(ZAngPP)
R 0,5·ZPP - ΔR = 0,5·ZPP(1-cos(ZAngPP))
Change the magnitude and angle of phase-to-phase voltage to achieve impedances at test
points 1, 2 and 3. For each test point, observe that the output signals, START, STLx and STPP
are activated where x refers to the actual phase to be tested. After the timer tPP for the actual
zone has elapsed, also the signals TRIP, TRPP and TRx shall be activated.
12.4.3.2 Phase-to-earth faults M14944-393 v7
For simplicity, the same test points as for phase-to-phase faults are proposed, but
considering new impedance values.
110
50%
ZAngPE R
Ohm/loop
Figure 38: Proposed test points for phase-to-earth faults
Table 22: Test points for phase-to-earth loops L1-L2 (Ohm/Loop)

Test Reach Value Comments
points
1 X ZPE · sin(ZAngPE)
R ZPE · cos(ZAngPE)
2 X 0,5·ZPE · sin(ZAngPE)
R 0,5·ZPE + ΔR = 0,5·ZPE · (1 - cos(ZAngPE))
3 X 0,5·ZPE·sin(ZangPE)
R 0,5·ZPE - ΔR = 0,5·ZPE · (1 - cos(ZAngPE))
Check also in the same way as for phase-to-earth fault for each test point that the output
signals STPE, are activated where x refers to the actual phase to be tested. After the timer tPE
for the zone has elapsed, also the signals TRIP, TRPE and TRx shall be activated.
12.4.4 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS GUID-79761A97-A99A-4788-94A5-341308DF6E45 v3
There is no specific test routine for this function. The function is tested in conjunction with
other impedance (mho) functions.
12.4.5 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic,

separate settings ZMRPDIS GUID-A35C2DED-70A6-4E96-864D-3A6C1147B350 v3
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section "Preparing for test" in this
chapter.
Consider releasing Zone 1 with the Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic (FRPSDPIS). If the autorecloser is not released and in service, trip will always be
three phase.
current as close as possible to its rated value or lower. But make sure it is higher than 30% of
the rated current.
111
Ensure that the maximum continuous current in an IED does not exceed four times its rated
conditions.
tested:

1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1 10 4
12
120° LD
a 5 Arg
6 b=
R (Ohm/phase)
7 13
9 c 20°
8
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
0.5 x RFPP
IEC05000368-3-en
measurements
112
1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1+XN 10 4
12
5 D
a
120°
A rgL
6 b=
R (Ohm/loop)
7 13
9 20°
8
c
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
alt. 80% of
RFPE
RFPE (Load
encroachment)
measurements

1 X X1set
R 0
2 X X1set
R R1set
3 X 0.8 x X1set
4 X 0.5 x X1set
5 X 0.85 x RFPP x tan (ArgRLd) ArgRLd = angle for the maximal load transfer
R 0.85 x RFPP
R RLdFw
R 0
8 X –0.2143 x RFPP/2 Exact: 0.8 x RFPP/2 (ArgDir)
R 0.8 x RFPP/2
9 X –0.4 x RLdFw x tan(ArgDir)
R 0.4 x RLdFw
10 X 0.5 x X1set Exact –0.5 x R1set x tan(ArgNegRes-90)
R –0.23 x X1set
11 X 0.8 x X1set Exact –0.5 x R1set x tan(ArgNegRes-90)
R –0.37 x X1 set
113

12 X 0.5 x X1set
R 0.5 x R1set
13 X 0 Only used when OperationLdCmp setting is 0

(Off)
R 0.5 x RFPP

R 0
3 X 0.8 x (2 x X1set+ X0set)/3
R 0.8 x (2 x R1set+ R0set)/3

+RFPEset
4 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set+ R0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set+R0set)/3 +
RFPEset
5 X 0.85 x RFPEset x tan(ArgLdset) ArgLd = angle for the maximal load transfer.
R 0.85 x RFPE
R RLdFwset
7 X 0
R RLdFwset
8 X –02143 x RLdFwset Exact: 0.8 x RFPE x tan (ArgDir)
R 0.8 x RLdFwset
9 X –0.8 x RLdFwset x tan(ArgDir)
R 0.8 x RLdFwset
R -0.36 x (2 x X1set + X0set) Exact: 0.5 x (2X1set + X0set)/(3 x tan(AgNegDir90)
R –0.57 x (2 x X1set + X0set) Exact: 0.8 x (2X1set + X0set)/(3 x tan(AngNegDir

90))
12 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set + X0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set + R0set)/3
13 X 0
R RFPE
12.4.5.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values GUID-02EE80DB-CE52-49F0-99C4-14FD84766009 v3
Procedure:
114
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operating value for test points 2, 3 in table23.
has to be released.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 above to find the operating value for the phase-to-earth fault L3-E
Test points 8, 9, 10 and 11 are intended to test the directional lines of

impedance protection. Since directionality is a common function for all 5
measuring zones, it is only necessary to test points 8, 9, 10 and 11 once, in
12.4.5.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones GUID-9AEFB83B-A343-4965-BB41-59062CC0DB5F v3
Procedure:
measurement with the setting tPP.
setting tPE.
has to be released.
12.4.6 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable

angle FRPSPDIS GUID-701C863B-40C6-42D7-A0C8-ECEB084B1165 v4
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section "Preparing for test" in this
chapter.
The phase selectors operate on the same measuring principles as the impedance measuring
zones. So it is necessary to follow the same principles as for distance protection, when
performing the secondary injection tests.
current as close as possible to the rated value of its associated input transformer, or lower.
But ensure that it is higher than 30% of the rated current.
Ensure that the maximum continuous current of an IED does not exceed four times its rated
conditions.
To verify the settings the operating points according to figures 41 and 42 should be tested.
See also tables 25 and 26 for information.
115
X ( W / loop)
4 85% 3
( X 1 + XN ) 5
ArgNegRes 60°
2 R ( W / loop)
7
6
50% of RLdFw
RFFwPE IEC09000734-4-en.vsd
single-phase faults
X ( W / phase)
4 85% 3
X1 ArgLd
5
ArgNegRes
60°
2
R ( W / phase)
6 7
ArgDir
50% RLdFw
0.5·RFFwPP IEC09000735-3-en.vsd
phase-to-phase faults
Table 25: Test points for phase-to-earth loop L3-E (Ohm/loop)

Test point Value Comments
1 X [X1+XN] XN=(X0-X1)/3
R 0
2 X 0
R RLdFw
116

3 X 0.85·[X1+XN] R≈0.491·(X1+XN)+RFFwPE
R 0.85·[X1+XN]·1/tan(60°)+RFFwPE
4 X 0.85·[X1+XN]
R -0.85·[X1+XN]·
tan (AngNegRes-90°)
5 X RFFwPE·tan (ArgLd)
R RFFwPE
R 0.5·RLdFw
The table showing test points for phase-to-earth loops is used together with figure 41.
Table 26: Test points for phase-to-phase loops L1–L2

1 X X1
R 0
2 X 0
R RLdFw
3 X 0.85·X1 R=0.491·X1+0.5 RFFwPP
R 0.85·X1·1/tan(60°)+0.5 RFFwPP
4 X 0.85·X1
R -0.85·X1·tan (AngNegRes-90°)
5 X 0.5·RFFwPP·tan (ArgLd)
R 0.5·RFFwPP
R 0.5·RLdFw
The table showing test points for phase-to-phase loops is used together with figure 42.
12.4.6.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values GUID-B1B7DEB6-7BC3-4A90-8D8F-E4E69B434AFA v3
Procedure:
operate value for of the phase-to-earth loop L3, test point 1, according to figure 41.
Compare the result of the measurement with the expected value according to table 25.
The corresponding binary signals that inform about the operation of the phase selection
measuring elements are available in the local HMI under
Main menu/Test/Function status/Impedance Protection/PhaseSelection(PDIS, 21)/
FRPSPDIS:x .
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operate values for the remaining test points according to
figure 41 and table 25.
117
When the load encroachment characteristic is deliberately set very high in

order not to have an influence, then the test points 2 and 5 can be
replaced by test point 7.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to find the operate value for the phase-to-phase fault in L1 — L2
purposes.
12.4.7 High speed distance protection zones, quadrilateral and mho

characteristic ZMFPDIS GUID-DF1650F4-EC3E-402B-BE26-EF2EF1034237 v5
conditions.
tested:

118
1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1 10 4
12
120° D
a 5 A rgL
6 b=
R (Ohm/phase)
7 13
9 c 20°
8
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
0.5 x RFPP
IEC05000368-3-en
measurements

1 X X1set
R 0
2 X X1set
R R1set
3 X 0.8 x X1set
4 X 0.5 x X1set
5 X 0.85 x RFPP x tan (ArgLd) ArgLd = angle for the maximal load transfer
R 0.85 x RFPP
R RLdFw
7 X 0
R RLdFw
R 0.8 x RFPP/2
R 0.4 x RLdFw
R –0.23 x X1set
R –0.37 x X1 set
119

12 X 0.5 x X1set
R 0.5 x R1set
13 X 0
R 0.5 x RFPP
1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1+XN 10 4
12
5 D
a
120°
A rgL
6 b=
R (Ohm/loop)
7 13
9 20°
8
c
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
alt. 80% of
RFPE
RFPE (Load
encroachment)
measurements

R 0
3 X 0.8 x (2 x X1set+ X0set)/3
R 0.8 x (2 x R1set+ R0set)/3

+RFPEset
4 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set+ R0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set+R0set)/3 +
RFPEset
R 0.85 x RFPE
R RLdFwset
120

7 X 0
R RLdFwset
8 X –02143 x RLdFwset Exact: 0.8 x RFPE x tan (ArgDir=20°)
R 0.8 x RLdFwset
tan(ArgDir=20°)
–0.8 x RLdFwdset x
tan(ArgDir=20°)
R 0.8 x RLdFwset

tan(AgNegDir=30°)

tan(AgNegDir=30°)
12 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set + X0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set + R0set)/3
13 X 0
R RFPE
12.4.7.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values GUID-3FA4B640-38E7-406E-8FCC-8DEDABB024C4 v4
Procedure:
operating value of the phase-to-phase fault for zone 1 according to test point 1 in figure
43 and table 27. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operating value for test points 2, 3 in table 27
has to be released.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to find the operating value for the phase-to-earth fault L3-E according
to figure 44 and table 28.

impedance protection. Since directionality is a common function for all six
measuring zones, it is only necessary to test 8, 9, 10 and 11 once, in the
forward direction in order to test the accuracy of directionality
12.4.7.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones GUID-BB93C603-F43E-40CB-8EFA-3B0F280C011D v5
Procedure:
121
measurement to the setting tPPZ1.
test point 12 in figure 44 and table 28. Compare the result of the measurement to the
setting tPEZ1.
The zones that are not tested have to be blocked and the zone that is tested has to be
released.
12.4.7.3 Completing the test GUID-60C5389E-B021-45BB-8CB3-E21348CF50EF v2
purposes.
12.4.8 High Speed distance for series compensated line zones,

quadrilateral and mho characteristic ZMFCPDIS GUID-EE954483-7157-4EA2-A5DD-537DF6864BC2 v3
conditions.
tested:
122
1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1 10 4
12
120° D
a 5 A rgL
6 b=
R (Ohm/phase)
7 13
9 c 20°
8
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
0.5 x RFPP
IEC05000368-3-en
measurements

1 X X1set
R 0
2 X X1set
R R1set
3 X 0.8 x X1set
4 X 0.5 x X1set
5 X 0.85 x RFPP x tan (ArgLd) ArgLd = angle for the maximal load transfer
R 0.85 x RFPP
R RLdFw
R 0
R 0.8 x RFPP/2
R 0.4 x RLdFw
R –0.23 x X1set
R –0.37 x X1 set
123

12 X 0.5 x X1set
R 0.5 x R1set
13 X 0
R 0.5 x RFPP
1 2
80%
11 3
50%
X1+XN 10 4
12
5 D
a
120°
A rgL
6 b=
R (Ohm/loop)
7 13
9 20°
8
c
40% of RLdFw
80% of RLdFw
alt. 80% of
RFPE
RFPE (Load
encroachment)
measurements

R 0
3 X 0.8 x (2 x X1set+ X0set)/3
R 0.8 x (2 x R1set+ R0set)/3

+RFPEset
4 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set+ R0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set+R0set)/3 +
RFPEset
R 0.85 x RFPE
R RLdFwset
124

7 X 0
R RLdFwset
8 X –02143 x RLdFwset Exact: 0.8 x RFPE x tan (ArgDir=20°)
R 0.8 x RLdFwset
tan(ArgDir=20°)
R 0.8 x RLdFwset

tan(AgNegDir=30°)

tan(AgNegDir=30°)
12 X 0.5 x (2 x X1set + X0set)/3
R 0.5 x (2 x R1set + R0set)/3
13 X 0
R RFPE
12.4.8.1 Measuring the operating limit of set values GUID-24FEBCE7-3409-4204-AA15-A1E0A1605866 v3
Procedure:
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operating value for test points 2, 3 in table 29.
has to be released.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to find the operating value for the phase-to-earth fault L3-E according
to figure 46 and table 30.

impedance protection. Since directionality is a common function for all six
measuring zones, it is only necessary to test points 8, 9, 10 and 11 once, in
12.4.8.2 Measuring the operating time of distance protection zones GUID-70AEC42A-9BC7-445A-AE21-2CEC0C3A79DC v3
Procedure:
125
measurement with the setting t1PP.
setting t1PE.
has to be released.
12.4.8.3 Completing the test GUID-7FA2EA27-B6E2-48AB-8D53-22425E322FFA v1
purposes.
12.4.9 Power swing detection ZMRPSB M13888-2 v9
The aim is to verify that the settings of the Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is
according to the setting table and to verify that ZMRPSB operates as expected.
Before starting this process, all impedance measuring zones shall be set and in operation. Test
the outer resistive boarder in forward and reverse direction, RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv and the
inner reactive boarder in forward and reverse direction X1InFw and X1InRv. See figure 47.
The corresponding resistive border for the inner resistive boundary and outer resistive
boundary is calculated automatically from the setting of kLdRFw and kLdRRv.
The inner zone of ZMRPSB must cover all zones by at least 10% margin.
The test is mainly divided into two parts, one which aim is to verify that the settings are in
accordance to the selectivity plan and a second part to verify the operation of ZMRPSB. The
proposed test points for validation of the settings are numbered according to figure 47
Test of the interactions or combinations that are not configured are not considered in this
instruction.
126
X1OutFw X ZL
X1InFw
RLdOutRv j j
2
1 R
RLdInRv RLdOutFw
RLdInFw
X1InRv
4
X1OutRv
IEC09000226_1_en.vsd
Figure 47: Operating principle and characteristic of the power swing detection function
(settings parameters in italic)
Where:
RLdInFw = RLdOutFw · kLdRFw
RLdInRv = RLdOutRv · kLdRRv
X1OutFw = X1InFw + (RLdOutFw - RLdInFw)
X1OutRv = X1InRv + (RLdOutFw - RLdInFw)
12.4.9.1 Verifying the settings M13888-11 v6
Preconditions
The following output signal shall be configured to binary output available: ZOUT, measured
impedance within outer impedance boundary.
1. Keep the measured current as close as possible to its rated value or lower. Keep it
constant during the test, but ensure that it is higher than the set minimum operating
current.
2. Ensure that the maximum continuous current to the IED does not exceed four times its
rated value, if the measurement of the operating characteristics runs under constant
voltage conditions.
3. Make the necessary connections and settings of the test equipment for test of point 1
according to figure 47.
127
4. Decrease the measured three-phase impedance slowly and observe the operation value
for the signal ZOUT.
5. Compare the operation value with the set value.
6. Do the necessary change of the setting of the test equipment and repeat step 4 and step
5 for point 2, 3 and 4 according to figure 47.
12.4.9.2 Testing the power swing detection function ZMRPSB M13888-27 v6
Preconditions
The following output signals shall be configured to binary outputs: ZOUT, measured
impedance within outer impedance boundary, ZIN, measured impedance within inner
impedance boundary and START, power swing detection.
1. Slowly decrease the measured impedance in all three phases until the START signal gets
activated.
2. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.
3. Decrease instantaneously voltages in all three phases to the values, which are
approximately 20% lower than the voltage that gives the set value R1LIn at the
predefined test current.
4. The START signal must not appear.
5. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.
12.4.9.3 Testing the tR1 timer M13888-47 v8
Preconditions
• The input I0CHECK, residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit the start output must
be configured to the output signal STPE on the FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS function.
• The input BLKI02, block inhibit of the start output for subsequent residual current
detection is connected to FALSE.
1. Program the test equipment for a single-phase to earth fault and energize FDPSPDIS or
FRPSDIS and check that the input BLOCK on the power swing detection function ZMRPSB
is activated.
2. Make a test sequence so that a single-phase to earth fault occurs after that the trajectory
of the impedance has passed the outer and inner boundary of ZMRPSB during power
swing. Use the result from test of ZMRPSB above to determine when the fault shall be
applied. The earth-fault must be activated before tR1 has elapsed.
3. Start the sequence and observe that the START signal will not be activated.
12.4.9.4 Testing the block input, interaction between FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS and
ZMRPSB M13888-73 v7
Precondition
The BLOCK input is configured and connected to STPE output on the FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS
function.
1. Make a test sequence so that a single phase-to-earth-fault occurs after that the
trajectory of the impedance has passed the outer boundary but not the inner boundary
of the power swing detection function ZMRPSB. Use the result from test of ZMRPSB
above to instance when the fault shall be applied.
2. Start the test sequence by continuously reducing the voltage and observe that the
output signal ZOUT may come, but not START.
128
If the input I0CHECK is configured (connected to output signal STPE on FDPSPDIS or

FRPSPDIS, the test of inhibit of ZMRPSB at earth-fault during power swing can be done in
the same way as for test of tR1. The inhibit of ZMRPSB shall be instantaneous if the input
TRSP is activated at the same time as the input I0CHECK during power swing.
purposes.
12.4.10 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM SEMOD175096-3 v2
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section "Requirements" and section
It is assumed that setting of the pole slip protection function PSPPPAM is done according to
impedances as seen in figure 48 and figure 49.
The test is done by means of injection of three-phase current and three-phase voltage from a
modern test device. This test device shall be able to give voltage and current with the
possibility to change voltage and current amplitude and the angle between the injected
voltage and current. The parameter setting shall be according to the real application chosen
values.
Procedure
1. Feed the IED with current and voltage corresponding to a normal operation point
Injected voltage U equal to base voltage (UBase) and the injected current I equal to half
the base current (IBase). The angle between the voltage and current shall be 0°.
2. With maintained amplitude of the injected voltage the current amplitude and angle is
changed to a value ZC/2.
This is done with a speed so that the final impedance is reached after 1 second. As the
injected voltage is higher than 0.92 UBase no START signal should be activated.
3. With reduced amplitude of the injected voltage to 0.8 UBase the current amplitude and
angle is changed to a value ZC/2.
injected voltage is lower than 0.92 UBase the START signal should be activated.
angle is changed via ZC/2 to a value corresponding to half IBase and 180° between the
injected current and voltage.
injected voltage is lower than 0.92 UBase the START signal should be activated. In
addition to this the signal ZONE1 should be activated.
5. Set N1Limit to 1 and repeat step 4.
Now the signals TRIP1 and TRIP should be activated.
angle is changed via ZC + (ZA – ZC)/2 to a value corresponding to half IBase and 180°
between the injected current and voltage.
This is done with a speed so that the final impedance is reached after 1s. As the injected
voltage is lower than 0.92 UBase the START signal should be activated. In addition to this
the signal ZONE2 should be activated.
7. Set N2Limit to 1 and repeat step 6.
Now the signals TRIP2 and TRIP should be activated.
129
Zone 1 Zone 2
EB X’d XT EA
ZS
IED
B A
jX
ZA
Pole slip
impedance
movement
Zone 2
ZC
TripAngle Zone 1
WarnAngle
f
R
ZB
Figure 48: Setting of the pole slip protection PSPPPAM
130
Imin > 0.10 IBase
Umax < 0.92 UBase AND
AND START
0.2 £ f(Ucos) £ 8Hz
d ³ StartAngle
AND ZONE1
Z cross line ZA - ZC
AND ZONE2
Z cross line ZC - ZB
Counter
aa³b
N1Limit b AND TRIP1
d £ TripAngle OR TRIP
Counter
a a³b
N2Limit b AND TRIP2
Figure 49: Logic diagram of the pole slip protection PSPPPAM
purposes.
12.4.11 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM GUID-BF2F7D4C-F579-4EBD-9AFC-7C03296BD5D4 v7
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM function in the IED can be used for both generator
protection and as well for line protection applications.
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, evaluate, and take the required
action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.
The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast as
possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1, which
normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the center of oscillation
is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more than one pole-slip is usually
allowed before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A parameter setting is
available to take into account the circuit breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-step
relays in the power system, then the one which finds the center of oscillation in its zone 1
should operate first.
Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow the direct
connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for very powerful
generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase, when each group is
equipped with current transformers. The protection function performs a simple summation of
the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.
131
12.4.11.1 Verifying the settings GUID-708C4033-3111-481F-9868-FF207C18C9F9 v1
The test of the out-of-step protection function is made to verify that the trip is issued if the
following events happen.
• the impedance, seen by the function, enters the lens characteristic from one side and
leaves it from the opposite side
• the trip is issued according to the settings TripAngle and tBreaker
The tripping zone needs to be detected and confirmed. The test may be performed by taking
into account the following key points that are shown in Figure 50:
• the point RE (RE = Receiving End)

• the intersection between the line segment SE-RE and the X-line, which is defined through
the setting ReachZ1
• the point SE (SE = Sending End)
I = I(50 Hz) + I(49.5 Hz)
Figure 50: Trajectory of the impedance Z(R, X) for the injected current with two
components: a 50 Hz component and a 49.5 Hz current component
The test of the out-of-step protection function requires the injection of the analog quantities
for a quite long time. The rating of the analogue channels is considered in order to avoid any
hardware damage. The test current is lower than the continuous permissive overload current
Iovrl of the protection current channels of the transformer module.
If the rated secondary current Irs of the analog channel is 1 A, then the maximum current test Its
is
I ts ≤ I ovrl = 4 × I rs = 4 A
EQUATION14041 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)
If the CT of the generator has ratio 9000/1 A, then in primary values
I rp 9000
I t ≤ I ovrl , p = I ovrl × = 4× = 36000 A
I rs 1
Reference is made to the numerical values of the example, explained in the “Setting guidelines”
of the Application Manual. A test current equal to 2.5 time the base current of the generator is
chosen; this choice is related to the selected test voltage that is applied while testing the point
SE and RE.
132
I t = 2.5 × I Base = 2.5 × 8367 = 20918 A

The parameter ReachZ1 defines the boundary between zone 1 and zone 2; it is expressed in
percent of the parameter ForwardX. If the setting of ReachZ1 = 12%, then corresponding
primary value of the reactance is
ReachZ 1 ForwardX 12 59.33

X RZ 1 = × × ZBase = × × 0.9522 = 0.0068Ω
100 100 100 100
The calculation of the test voltage, that is related to ReachZ1, is based on the impedance ZRZ1
that has imaginary part XRZ1 and real part RRZ1 :
Re achZ 1 ForwardR 12 8.19

RRZ 1 = × × ZBase = × × 0.9522 = 0.009Ω
100 100 100 100
The magnitude of the impedance ZRZ1 is:
Z RZ 1 = RRZ 1 + X RZ 1 = 0.009 + 0.068 = 0.069 W

2 2 2 2
Hence the reference voltage of the test of the boundary between zone 1 and zone 2 is
Vt ,RZ 1 = Z RZ 1 × I t = 0.069 × 20918 = 1435V
If the test voltage is lower than Vt,RZ1 (or in opposition), then the test is related to the zone 1; if
the test voltage is higher than Vt,RZ1, then the test is related to the zone 2.
Considering the resistances and reactances which are related to the settings (ForwardR,
ForwardX) and (ReverseR, ReverseX):
ForwardR 8.19
RFwdR = × ZBase = × 0.9522 = 0.078 Ω
100 100
ForwardX 59.33
X FwdX = × ZBase = × 0.9522 = 0.565 Ω
100 100
ReverseR 0.29
RRvsR = × ZBase = × 0.9522 = 0.003 Ω
100 100
ReverseR 29.6
X RvsX = × ZBase = × 0.9522 = 0.282 Ω
100 100
and the voltages that are related to them:
Vt ,FwdZ = Z FwdZ × I t = R 2 FwdR + X 2 FwdX × I t = 0.0782 + 0.5652 × 20918 = 0.570

0 × 20918 = 11931V
Vt ,RvsZ = Z RvsZ × I t = R 2 RvsR + X 2 RvsX × I t = 0.0032 + 0.2822 × 20918 = 0.282

2 × 20918 = 5899V
133
The previous calculations are in primary values. They are transferred to secondary values to
perform injections by a test set. Primary values are transferred to secondary values by taking
into account the CT ratio and the VT ratio (respectively 9000/1 A and 13.8/0.1 kV in the
example).
The magnitude of the secondary voltages, that are related to the points RE and SE of the R-X
plane, needs to be checked.
RE (RFwdR, XFwdX):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vt ,FwdZs = Vt ,FwdZ × = 11931 × = 86.45V
VVT , p 13.8
SE (RRvsR, XRvsX):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vt ,RvsZs = Vt ,RvsZ × = 5899 × = 42.75V
VVT , p 13.8
The tests, which are described in this section, may require voltages that have magnitude equal
to 110% of the previous values. The continuous permissive overload voltage of the protection
voltage channels of the TRM module is 420 V; so the previous voltages may be applied to the
analog channels of the IED continuously. Limitations may be related to the available test set;
the current It was calculated by using a factor 2.5 (instead of the maximum value 4) in order to
reduce the magnitude of the test voltage for the points RE and SE.
Test sets usually do not have a feature to simulate a real network during a power swing and
apply the related analog quantities at the terminal of the generator. The scope of the present
test is not a simulation of a real network. Voltages and currents are supplied in order to
measure an impedance that changes in the time and traverses the plane R-X and, in particular,
the area inside the lens characteristic. The test may be performed by applying:
• Symmetric three-phase voltage at 50 Hz. The magnitude depends on the point of the
characteristic that needs to be verified. The following three main points of the line
segment SE-RE need to be checked:
• the point RE (RFwdR, XFwdX)
• a point which is related to the parameter ReachZ1 (boundary between zone 1 and
zone 2)
• the point SE (RRvsR, XRvsX)
The phase angle of the test voltages is equal to:
• arctan (ForwardX/ForwardR) for tests in the quadrant 1 and 2 of the R-X plane
• arctan (ReverseX/ReverseR) -180° for tests in the quadrant 3 and 4 of the R-X plane
• Symmetric three-phase current, where the current is the summation of two currents that
have the same magnitude, but different frequencies.
It 20918
I 50 = I tf = = = 10459 A
2 2
GUID-F02E8D18-FF87-45BE-8142-E8FA19F6966B V1 EN-US (Equation 16)
The first current I50 has frequency 50 Hz, magnitude 10459 A (that is, 1.162 A secondary)
and phase angle 0º.
The second current Itf has magnitude 10459 A (that is, 1.162 A secondary), phase angle
180º (at the starting time of the test) and frequency:
134
• 49.5 Hz for the test as generator in the quadrant 1 and 2 of the R-X plane
• 50.5 Hz for the test as generator in the quadrant 3 and 4 of the R-X plane
When the trajectory of the impedance, that is seen by the protection function,
traverses the lens characteristic then a pole slipping is detected. The present
procedure avoids tests of points of the line SE-RE that are too close to the R-
axis because in that case the voltage is close to zero and, therefore, the
impedance may approach a not defined quantity 0/0.
The accuracy of the impedance reach is ±2% of the base impedance; that is
considered while evaluating the test results.
For the test as motor the frequency current may have 50.5 Hz in the quadrant 1
and 2 of the R-X plane and 49.5 Hz in the quadrant 3 and 4.
Verifying the settings by secondary injection GUID-1752CE04-7C0F-4D37-9602-B22D8096DD2D v1

It is advised to connect the analog output channels of the function block OOSPPAM to the
internal disturbance recorder (and in particular to the function block A4RADR) in order to
perform a better analysis of the tests.
If the device is in test mode, the recording of the disturbances are enabled by the setting in
Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Monitoring/Disturbance report/DisturbanceReport/
DRPRDRE:1: set the parameter OpModeTest to On.
1. Check the Application Configuration: verify that hardware voltage and current channels of
the IED are properly connected to SMAI function blocks, and that the proper analog
outputs of SMAI’s are connected to the analog inputs of the function block OOSPPAM.
2. Connect three-phase voltage channels of the test set to the appropriate IED terminals.
3. Connect in parallel two groups of three-phase currents of the test set to the appropriate
IED terminals.
4. Connect the appropriate trip output of the IED to the input channel of the test set that
monitors the trip.
5. Go to Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Impedance protection/OutOfStep(78,Ucos)/
OOSPPAM(78,Ucos):1, and make sure that the function is enabled, that is, Operation is set
to On.
12.4.11.2 Test of point RE (RFwdR, XFwdX)

GUID-911D370F-8767-4D6C-9621-8663DD26006C v1
The trajectory of the impedance does not enter the lens characteristic. GUID-5C5E9BEB-AA60-474E-ACEC-B972ACFE6FA2 v1
Preliminary steady state test at 50 Hz GUID-8F95CCCC-3282-48E8-9F5E-3F3E77CCCAAE v1
• Go to Main menu/Test/Function status/Impedance protection/OutOfStep(78,Ucos)/

OOSPPAM(78,Ucos):1/Outputs to check the available service values of the function block
OOSPPAM.
• Apply the following three-phase symmetrical quantities (the phase angle is related to
phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,FwdZ × = 1.1 × 11931 × = 95.1V
VVT , p 13.8
135
 ForwardX   59.33 
∠Vts = arctan   = arctan   = 82..14°
 ForwardR   8.19 
frequency of Vts = 50 Hz
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s=0°
frequency of I50s = 50 Hz
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs=0°
frequency of Itfs = 50 Hz
• Check that the service values (VOLTAGE, CURRENT, R(%), X(%)) are according to the
injected quantities and that ROTORANG is close to 0 rad.
For this particular injection the service values are:
• VOLTAGE = 13.12 kV
• CURRENT = 20918 A
• R = 9.01%
• X = 65.27%
• ROTORANG = 0.04 rad
Note that these values identify a point outside the lens characteristic, even if it is close to the
point RE. Neither START nor TRIP is issued.
Execution of the dynamic test GUID-0B73C849-107D-40DC-80BB-31CD441BF69A v1

The test may be performed by using two states of a sequence tool that is a basic feature of
test sets.
• State 1: pre-test condition.

Steady voltage and current are applied in order to get a steady high impedance. This is a
point in the plane R-X that is far away from the lens characteristic. Define the following
three-phase symmetrical quantities (the phase angle is related to phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,FwdZ × = 1.1 × 11931 × = 95.1V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I50s=0 A
Itfs=0 A
• State 2: main test step.

Define the following three-phase symmetrical quantities (the phase angle is related to
phase L1):
136
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,FwdZ × = 1.1 × 11931 × = 95.1V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 180º
frequency of Itfs = 49.5 Hz
Expected result: the protection function does not issue either start or trip.
The trajectory of the impedance traverses the lens characteristic in zone 2 GUID-9F0FE404-6D83-4308-9FE4-13259CE7D07A v1
Preliminary steady state test at 50 Hz GUID-700F4EA1-B7D9-4B77-829A-433BB67C8A01 v1

OOSPPAM.
phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,FwdZ × = 0.9 × 11931 × = 77.81V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 0º
137
frequency of Itf = 50 Hz
• Check that the service values (VOLTAGE, CURRENT, R(%), X(%) ) are according to the
injected quantities and that ROTORANG is close to 3.14 rad. For this particular injection
the service values are:
• R = 7.37%
• X = 53.40%
• ROTORANG = -3.09 rad
Note that these values identify a point inside the lens characteristic, in the zone 2, that is
close to the point RE. The START is issued, but no TRIP is performed.
Execution of the dynamic test GUID-028D7D67-B61A-4A7F-9978-4A0A41231B04 v1

test sets.

Steady voltage and current are applied in order to get a steady high impedance, that is, a
point in the plane R-X which is far away from the lens characteristic. Define the following
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,FwdZ × = 0.9 × 11931 × = 77.81V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I50s = 0 A
Itfs = 0 A

phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,FwdZ × = 0.9 × 11931 × = 77.81V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
138
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 180º
Expected result: start of the protection function and trip in zone 2, when trip conditions are
fulfilled.
12.4.11.3 Test of the boundary between zone 1 and zone 2, which is defined by the
parameter ReachZ1 GUID-BE180E07-7D4B-4842-81FB-244DE8897430 v1
The trajectory of the impedance traverses the lens characteristic in zone 2 GUID-17F6AC8D-1F57-4245-A61D-776D469DD153 v1
Preliminary steady state test at 50 Hz GUID-3D42E43D-873E-4271-9AAF-3B2789FF3B17 v1

OOSPPAM.
phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,RZ 1 × = 1.1 × 1435 × = 11.44V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 0º
frequency of Itfs = 50 Hz
• R = 1.08%
• X = 7.85%
139
Note that these values identify a point inside the lens characteristic, in the Zone 2, that is close
to the boundary between zone 1 and zone 2. The START is issued, but no TRIP is performed.
Execution of the dynamic test GUID-53964189-42E4-4C4B-BFCD-64888BA938EF v1

test sets.

Steady voltage and current are applied in order to get a steady high impedance, that is a
point in the plane R-X that is far away from the lens characteristic. Define the following
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,RZ 1 × = 1.1 × 1435 × = 11.44V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
frequency of Vt= 50 Hz.

I50s = 0 A
Itfs = 0 A

phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,RZ 1 × = 1.1 × 1435 × = 11.44V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
frequency of Vt = 50 Hz
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 180º
Expected result: start of the protection function and trip in zone 2 when trip conditions
are fulfilled.
140
The trajectory of the impedance traverses the lens characteristic in zone 1 GUID-12F82DD8-A4CE-48C9-944B-0CF3B3F6C9F9 v1
Preliminary steady state test at 50 Hz GUID-AA953F5F-2389-4F05-8BBD-D8DC9AF3B0E4 v1

OOSPPAM.
phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,RZ 1 × = 0.9 × 1435 × = 9.36V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 0º
• R = 0.89%
• X=6.42%
Note that these values identify a point inside the lens characteristic in zone 1, that is close
to the boundary between zone 1 and zone 2. The START is issued, but no TRIP is
performed.
Execution of the dynamic test GUID-98707DB3-9A1A-4458-9704-25F8FCB94B79 v1

test sets.

141
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,RZ 1 × = 0.9 × 1435 × = 9.36V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I50s = 0 A
Itfs = 0 A

phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,RZ 1 × = 0.9 × 1435 × = 9.36V
VVT , p 13.8
 ForwardX   59.33 
 ForwardR   8.19 
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 180º
are fulfilled.
12.4.11.4 Test of the point SE (RRvsR, XRvsX)

GUID-335F54E6-52DE-4BF1-A34B-0C2DB8059CC1 v1
The trajectory of the impedance traverses the lens characteristic in zone 1 GUID-2DD20D2E-6188-4631-A584-5E68B212E011 v1
Preliminary steady state test at 50 Hz GUID-7BCF3D7B-1B84-46D4-B9E3-066894A878E8 v1

OOSPPAM.
phase L1):
142
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,RvsZ × = 0.9 × 5899 × = 38.47V
VVT , p 13.8
ÐVts = arctan ç
æ ReverseX ö - 180° = arctan æ 29.60 ö - 180° = -90.56°
÷ ç ÷
è ReverseR ø è 0.29 ø
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 0º
• R = -0.26%
• X = -26.65%
Note that these values identify a point inside the lens characteristic in zone 1 that is close
to the point SE. The START is issued, but no TRIP is performed.
Execution of the dynamic test GUID-FF6DCD5B-96AA-4255-8740-B85C8C7148F5 v1

test sets.

VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,RvsZ × = 0.9 × 5899 × = 38.47V
VVT , p 13.8
ÐVts = arctan ç
÷ ç ÷
I50s = 0 A
Itfs = 0 A
143

phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 0.9 × Vt ,RvsZ × = 0.9 × 5899 × = 38.47V
VVT , p 13.8
ÐVts = arctan ç
÷ ç ÷
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 180º
are fulfilled.
The trajectory of the impedance does not enter the lens characteristic GUID-189FECED-12A7-4A41-BCCF-D93C0FF9FA41 v1
Preliminary steady state test at 50 Hz GUID-448D5357-6CC2-438E-83CA-25FD381B7DFF v1

OOSPPAM.
phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,RvsZ × = 1.1 × 5899 × = 47.02V
VVT , p 13.8
ÐVts = arctan ç
÷ ç ÷
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
144
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 0º
injected quantities and that ROTORANG is close to 0 rad. For this particular injection the
service values are:
• VOLTAGE= 6.49 kV
• CURRENT= 20918 A
• R= –0.32%
• X=–32.57%
• ROTORANG= 0.08 rad
Note that these values identify a point outside the lens characteristic, even if it is close to
the point SE. Neither START nor TRIP is issued.
Execution of the dynamic test GUID-31EF4F76-8FC8-4952-896C-B3A8A5FD635A v1

test sets.

Steady voltage and current are applied in order to get a steady high impedance, that is, a
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,RvsZ × = 1.1 × 5899 × = 47.02V
VVT , p 13.8
ÐVts = arctan ç
÷ ç ÷
I50s = 0 A
Itfs = 0 A

phase L1):
VVT ,s 0.1
Vts = 1.1 × Vt ,RvsZ × = 1.1 × 5899 × = 47.02V
VVT , p 13.8
ÐVts = arctan ç
÷ ç ÷
145
I CTs 1
I 50 s = I 50 × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠I50s = 0º
I CTs 1
It fs = Itf × = 10459 × = 1.162 A
I CTp 9000
∠Itfs = 180º
Expected result: the protection function does not issue either start or trip.
GUID-7C9F1163-0186-41DA-9D5F-DDA589323B9F v1
After each test it is possible to download and study the related disturbance recording.
COMMON TRIP COMMAND (trip)

2
1
0
TRIPZ1 (tripZone1)
1
0
-1
TRIPZ2 (tripZone2)
2
1
0
START (start)
2
1
0
GENMODE (generatorMode)
2
1
0
MOTMODE (motorMode)
1
0
-1
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
time in seconds →
Figure 51: Boolean output signals for the injected current with two components: a 50 Hz
current component and a 49.5 Hz current component
12.4.12 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF M13850-2 v8
The automatic switch onto fault logic function ZCVPSOF is checked using secondary injection
tests together with the Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection
function and with the dead line detection function (DLD), which is embedded in ZCVPSOF.
146
ZCVPSOF is activated either by the external input BC, or by the internal DLD. FUFSPVC is done
with a pre-fault condition where the phase voltages and currents are at zero. A reverse three-
phase fault with zero impedance and a three-phase fault with an impedance corresponding to
the whole line is applied. This fault shall cause an instantaneous trip and result in a TRIP
indication.
12.4.12.1 Activating ZCVPSOF externally M13850-14 v7
1. Activate the switch onto fault BC input.

During normal operating conditions, the BC input is de-energized.
2. Set AutoInitMode to DLD disabled and Mode to Impedance.
3. Apply a three-phase fault condition corresponding to a fault at approximately 45% of the
line or with impedance at 50% of the used zone setting and current greater than 30% of
IBase.
The ZACC input is activated.
4. Check that the TRIP output, external signals and indication are obtained.
12.4.12.2 Initiating ZCVPSOF automatically and setting mode to impedance M13850-27 v7
1. Deactivate the switch onto fault BC input.

2. Set the current and voltage inputs to lower than IPh< and UPh< for at least one second.
3. Set AutoInitMode to Voltage and Mode to Impedance.
4. Apply a three-phase fault condition corresponding to a fault at approximately 45% of the
line or with impedance at 50% of the used zone setting and current greater than 30% of
IBase.Apply a two-phase fault condition corresponding to a fault at approximately 45%
of the line or with impedance at 50% of the used zone setting and current greater than
30% of IBase.
The ZACC input is activated.
5. Check that the correct TRIP output, external signals and indication are obtained.
12.4.12.3 Initiating ZCVPSOF automatically and setting mode to UILevel GUID-E83E1B3D-026C-48DB-BB9B-43C6597DE5DB v4
1. Deactivate the switch onto fault BC input.

2. Set the current and voltage inputs to lower than IPh< and UPh< for at least one second.
3. Set AutoInitMode to Voltage and Mode to UILevel.
4. Apply the three-phase currents in such a way that the magnitudes are greater than IPh<
and the three-phase voltages in such a way that the magnitudes and lower than UPh< at
least for the duration of the tDuration setting.
5. Check that the correct TRIP output, external signals and indication are obtained.
purposes.
12.4.13 Loss of excitation LEXPDIS SEMOD158873-3 v3

147
The test is done by means of injection of three phase current and three phase voltage from a
modern test device. This test device shall be able to give voltage and current corresponding to
the set apparent impedance.
1. Feed the IED with current and voltage corresponding to the apparent impedance: Test #1,
as shown in figure 52. Read the analog outputs for R and X and check that this reading
corresponds to the injected impedance. No start or trip signals shall be activated.
2. Feed the IED with current and voltage corresponding to the apparent impedance: Test
#2, as shown in figure 52. Read the analog outputs for R and X and check that this reading
corresponds to the injected impedance. No start or trip signals shall be activated.
#3, as shown in figure 52. Read the analog outputs for R and X and check that this reading
corresponds to the injected impedance. The signals START and STZ2 shall be activated
instantaneously and the signals TRIP and TRZ2 shall be activated after the set delay tZ2.
4. Switch the current infeed injection off. The function shall reset. Turn the current on with
the values corresponding to Test #3 and measure the time to activation of signal TRZ2.
This time shall be compared to tZ2.
#4, as shown in figure 52. Read the analog outputs for R and X and check that this
reading corresponds to the injected impedance. The signals START, STZ2 and STZ1 shall
be activated instantaneously and the signals TRIP, TRZ2 and TRZ1 shall be activated after
the different set time delays.
6. Switch the current infeed injection off. The function shall reset. Turn the current on with
the values corresponding to Test #4 and measure the time to activation of signal TRZ1.
This time shall be compared to tZ1.
Underexcitation Protection Test #1

Test #2 Restrain area
R
Test #3
Test #4
Z1, Fast zone

Z2, Slow zone
Figure 52: Testing current and voltage corresponding to the apparent impedance
148
purposes.
12.4.14 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ GUID-BD8EE7A0-710D-49C8-9B56-CB908BAF2C59 v7
The Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is tested with a three-phase testing equipment
for distance protections. PPLPHIZ is tested in co-operation with the Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic function ZMQPDIS. The distance protection and the phase
preference logic shall be set to values according to the real set values to be used. The test is
made by means of injection of voltage and current where the amplitude of both current and
voltage and the phase angle between the voltage and current can be controlled.
During the test the following binary signals (outputs) shall be monitored:
• Trip signal from distance protection
• Start signal from phase preference logic
1. Connect the test set for injection of voltage and current.

2. Inject voltages and currents corresponding to a phase-to-phase to earth fault within zone
1 of the distance protection function. In the test one of the current inputs (one of the
faulted phases) is disconnected. The remaining current is the fault current out on the
protected line. All combinations of two phase-to-earth faults with one phase current are
tested. The result shall be according to table 31. It should be checked that the fault will
give phase-to-phase voltage, phase-to-earth voltage, zero-sequence voltage and phase
current so that the conditions set for the logic are fulfilled.
Table 31: Operation at different combinations of faults and operation mode

OperMode Fault type/Faulted phase current to the IED
L1L2N/IL1 L1L2N/IL2 L2L3N/IL2 L2L3N/IL3 L3L3N/IL1 L3L1N/IL3
No Filter Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip
No Pref Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip
1231c Trip No Trip Trip No Trip No Trip Trip
1321c No Trip Trip No Trip Trip Trip No Trip
123a Trip No Trip Trip No Trip Trip No Trip
132a Trip No Trip No Trip Trip Trip No Trip
213a No Trip Trip Trip No Trip Trip No Trip
231a No Trip Trip Trip No Trip No Trip Trip
312a Trip No Trip No Trip Trip No Trip Trip
321a No Trip Trip No Trip Trip No Trip Trip
12.4.14.1 Completing the test GUID-8BD66BC8-AAC3-41C4-B819-B159361688D2 v4
purposes.
149
12.4.15 Under impedance protection for Generator ZGVPDIS GUID-F882501B-6A03-4409-BF70-DE1CF09E5541 v3
Prepare the IED for verification of settings.
Values of the logical signals for ZGVPDIS are available on the local HMI under Main menu/
Tests/Function status/Impedance/ZGVPDIS (21G, Z<)/1:ZGVPDIS:ZGVPDIS. The Signal
Monitoring in PCM600 shows the same signals that are available on the local HMI.
12.4.15.1 Verifying the settings GUID-202C5606-5F12-4C00-A12F-02A33EB571D9 v1
GUID-69610335-7C97-4134-8A47-05501AB5C620 v3
Distance protection zones

While measuring operating characteristics, keep the current constant. Keep the current as
close as possible to its rated value or lower, however make sure it is higher than 30% of the
rated current.
If the measurement of the operating characteristics runs under constant voltage conditions,
ensure that the maximum continuous current in an IED does not exceed four times its rated
value.
To verify the zone 1 mho characteristic, at least two points must be tested.
P1
Z1Fwd
P3 P2
LineAngle
R
Z1Rev
P4
Figure 53: Proposed four test points for phase-to-phase fault

Where,
Z1Fwd is the forward positive sequence impedance setting for zone 1

Z1Rev is the reverse positive sequence impedance setting for zone 1
LineAngle is the Impedance angle for phase-to-phase fault in degrees
150
Test points X R
P1 Z1Fwd · sin(LineAngle) Z1Fwd · cos(LineAngle)
P2 ((Z1Fwd -Z1Rev / 2) · sin(LineAngle)) Z1Fwd / 2 · (1 + cos(LineAngle) + Z1Rev / 2 · (1
– cos(LineAngle))
P3 ((Z1Fwd -Z1Rev / 2) · sin(LineAngle)) -Z1Fwd / 2 · (1 – cos(LineAngle) + Z1Rev / 2 ·
(1 + cos(LineAngle))
P4 -Z1Rev · sinLineAngle -Z1Rev · cos(LineAngle)
Change the magnitude and angle of phase-to-phase voltage, to achieve impedances at test
points P1, P2, P3 and P4. For each test point, observe that the output signals, START and STZ1
are activated where x refers to the actual phase to be tested. After the operate time delay for
the zone 1 has elapsed, the signals TRIP and TRZ1 shall be activated.
To verify zone 2 and zone 3 mho characteristic, at least two points must be tested.
P1
ZxFwd
P3 P2
LineAngle
R
ZxRev
P4
Figure 54: Proposed four test points for phase-to-earth fault

Where,
ZxFwd is the forward positive sequence impedance setting for zone x (where, x is 2- 3
depending on the zone selected)
ZxRev is the reverse positive sequence impedance setting for zone x (where x is 2- 3
depending on the zone selected)
LineAngle is the Impedance angle for phase-to-phase fault in degrees
Test points X R
P1 ZxFwd · sin(LineAngle) ZxFwd · cos(LineAngle)
P2 ((ZxFwd -ZxRev / 2) · sin(LineAngle)) ZxFwd / 2 · (1 + cos(LineAngle) + ZxRev/2 · (1
– cos(LineAngle))
P3 ((ZxFwd -ZxRev / 2) · sin(LineAngle)) -ZxFwd / 2 · (1 – cos(LineAngle) + ZxRev / 2 ·
(1 + cos(LineAngle))
P4 -ZxRev · sin(LineAngle) -ZxRev · cos(LineAngle)
151
Change the magnitude and angle of phase-to-phase voltage to achieve impedances at test
points P1, P2, P3 and P4. For each test point, observe that the output signals, START and STZx
are activated (where x is 2 or 3 depending on selected zone). After the operate time delay of
the respective zone has elapsed, also the signals TRIP and TRZx (where x is 2 or 3 depending on
selected zone) shall be activated.
Load encroachment GUID-4E0958A9-000E-440F-A880-89B54774AC63 v3

Load encroachment operates on the same measuring principles as the impedance measuring
zones. Thus, it is necessary to follow the same principles as for distance protection when
performing the secondary injection tests. Measure operating characteristics during constant
current conditions. Keep the injected current as close as possible to the rated value of its
associated input transformer or lower. Ensure, however, that it is higher than 30% of the rated
current. Ensure that the maximum continuous current of an IED does not exceed four times Its
rated value, if the measurement of the operating characteristics runs under constant voltage
conditions.
Measuring the operate limit of set values of load encroachment function
The load encroachment does not have any special output to be verified. It can only be verified
with the distance START and TRIP outputs.
Steps to test the load encroachment:
2. Apply the fault condition and slowly decrease the injected impedance to find the operate
value for of the phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase loops.
Under voltage seal-in GUID-1219D2CC-D2EC-44B1-8F2E-A4C292590680 v2

The under voltage seal-in logic can be verified using the TRUV and STUV outputs.
Steps to verify the logic:
1. Keep all the current and voltage in normal balanced condition.

2. Keeping the phase current at rated value, slowly reduce the voltage till it enters into the
respective zone mho characteristics and also below the set value of the under voltage
seal-in logic.
3. Before the operate time delay of the respective zone, reduce the current magnitude so
that the operating impedance moves out of the mho characteristics.
4. The under voltage seal-in should give a START and TRIP after the operate time delay is set
for the under voltage logic.
12.4.15.2 Completing the test GUID-93110921-550A-441F-A36F-901488CC41BB v3
Continue to test another function or end the testing by setting the parameter TestMode to Off
under Main menu/Tests/IED test mode/1: TESTMODE. If another function is tested, then set
the parameter Blocked to No under Main menu/Tests/Function test modes/Impedance/
ZGVPDIS/1: ZGVPDIS for the function, or for each individual function in a chain, to be tested
next. Remember to set the parameter Blocked to Yes, for each individual function that has
been tested.
12.4.16 Rotor earth fault protection with RXTTE4 and general current
and voltage protection CVGAPC SEMOD158692-3 v2
152
12.4.16.1 Testing SEMOD158692-13 v2
The protection function uses injection of an ac voltage to the generator field circuit. The
COMBIFLEX voltage injection unit RXTTE4, Part No 1MRK 002 108-AB contains a voltage
transformer with a primary winding for connection to 120 or 230 V, 50 or 60 Hz supply voltage.
From the secondary winding of this internal voltage transformer approximately 40 V AC is
injected via series capacitors and resistors into the rotor circuit. The injected voltage is fed to
a voltage input of the REG670 IED. The current caused by the injection is fed to a current input
of the REG670 IED via a current transformer, which is amplifying the current ten times, as
shown in figure 55.
Generator rotor winding
Connection to be done
by the panel builder
Optional
external resistor
RXTTE 4
REG 670 221 222
421
I
428
313
230 V AC
314
120 V AC
315
324 0
U 325
en06000498.vsd
Figure 55: Ten times amplification of current via a current transformer

The test described in steps 1 to 6 can be done with the generator at stand-still situations.
Procedure
1. The test should be prepared with a switch connected between the output of RXTTE4
(221) and the station earth. Initially this switch is open.
2. First the 120 (230) V input to RXTTE4 is disconnected. This should give a signal from
REG670 that the injection voltage is low.
3. Reconnect the 120 (230) V input and check that the low injection voltage signal resets.
153
4. Close the switch to the station earth and check that the trip from the rotor earth fault will
be given after the set delay time.
5. Open the switch to the station earth and check that the trip signal resets
instantaneously.
6. Connect an adjustable resistor to the field circuit (221 on RXTTE4). Decrease this resistor
from a large value until the function operates and check monitored value ICOSFI.
When the generator has been started the service value of injection voltage and injection
current shall be checked so that there is no risk for unwanted trip due to large capacitive
detected current.
purposes.
12.5 Current protection SEMOD53531-1 v1
12.5.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output

PHPIOC M11754-3 v7
To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:
• Phase-to-earth fault
Ensure that the maximum continuous current, supplied from the current source used for the
test of the IED, does not exceed four times the rated current value of the IED.
12.5.1.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values M11754-11 v6
1. Inject a phase current into the IED with an initial value below that of the setting.
2. Set the operation mode to 1 out of 3.
3. Increase the injected current in the Ln phase until the TRL (n=1–3) signal appears.
4. Switch the fault current off.
Observe: Do not exceed the maximum permitted overloading of the

current circuits in the IED.
5. Compare the measured operating current with the set value.

6. Set the operation mode to 2 out of 3 and inject current into one of the phases. Check - no
operation.
purposes.
154
12.5.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output

OC4PTOC SEMOD56287-67 v7
Verification of the non-directional phase overcurrent function is done as

instructed below, without applying any polarizing voltage.
1. Connect the test set for current injection to the appropriate IED phases.
If there is any configuration logic that is used to enable or block any of the four available
overcurrent steps, make sure that the step under test is enabled (for example, end fault
protection).
If 1 out of 3 currents for operation is chosen: Connect the injection current to phases L1
and neutral.
If 2 out of 3 currents for operation is chosen: Connect the injection current into phase L1
and out from phase L2.
If 3 out of 3 currents for operation is chosen: Connect the symmetrical three-phase
injection current into phases L1, L2 and L3.
2. Connect the test set for the appropriate three-phase voltage injection to the IED phases
L1, L2 and L3. The protection shall be fed with a symmetrical three-phase voltage.
3. Block higher set stages when testing lower set stages by following the procedure
described below:
3.1. Set the injected polarizing voltage slightly larger than the set minimum polarizing
voltage (default is 5% of UBase) and set the injection current to lag the appropriate
voltage by an angle of about 80° if forward directional function is selected.
If 1 out of 3 currents for operation is chosen: The voltage angle of phase L1 is the
reference.
If 2 out of 3 currents for operation is chosen: The voltage angle of phase L1 – the
voltage angle of L2 is the reference.
If 3 out of 3 currents for operation is chosen: The voltage angle of phase L1 is the
reference.
If reverse directional function is selected, set the injection current to lag the
polarizing voltage by an angle equal to 260° (equal to 80° + 180°).
3.2. Increase the injected current, note the operate value of the tested step of the
function and compare it to the set value.
3.3. Decrease the current slowly, note the reset value and compare it to the reset ratio
95%.
4. If the test has been performed by injection of current in phase L1, repeat the test,
injecting current into phases L2 and L3 with polarizing voltage connected to phases L2,
respectively L3 (1 out of 3 currents for operation).
5. If the test has been performed by injection of current in phases L1 – L2, repeat the test,
injecting current into phases L2 – L3 and L3 – L1 with the appropriate phase angle of
injected currents.
6. Connect a trip output contact to a timer.
7. Set the injected current to 200% of the operate level of the tested stage, switch on the
current and check the time delay.
For inverse time curves, check the operate time at a current equal to 110% of the operate
current for txMin.
8. Check that all operate and start contacts operate according to the configuration (signal
matrixes).
155
9. Reverse the direction of the injected current and check that the protection does not
operate.
10. If 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 currents for operation is chosen: Check that the function will not
operate with current in one phase only.
11. Repeat the above described tests for the higher set stages.
12. Check that start and trip information is stored in the event menu.
purposes.
12.5.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC SEMOD52967-3 v6
To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:
• Phase-to-earth fault
Ensure that the maximum continuous current, supplied from the current source used for the
test of the IED, does not exceed four times the rated current value of the IED.
12.5.3.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values SEMOD52967-11 v8
1. Inject a phase current into the IED with an initial value below that of the setting.
2. Increase the injected current in the Ln or in the neutral (summated current input) phase
until the TRIP signal appears.
Observe to not exceed the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the
IED.
4. Compare the measured operating current with the set value.
purposes.
12.5.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or

negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC SEMOD53296-3 v8
12.5.4.1 Four step directional earth fault protection SEMOD53296-208 v6
1. Connect the test set for single current injection to the appropriate IED terminals.
156
Connect the injection current to terminals L1 and neutral.

2. Set the injected polarizing voltage slightly larger than the set minimum polarizing voltage
(default 5% of Ur) and set the injection current to lag the voltage by an angle equal to the
set reference characteristic angle (AngleRCA), if the forward directional function is
selected.
If reverse directional function is selected, set the injection current to lag the polarizing
voltage by an angle equal to RCA+ 180°.
3. Increase the injected current and note the value at which the studied step of the function
operates.
4. Decrease the current slowly and note the reset value.
5. If the test has been performed by injection of current in phase L1, repeat the test,
injecting current into terminals L2 and L3 with a polarizing voltage connected to
terminals L2, respectively L3.
6. Block lower set steps when testing higher set steps according to the instructions that
follow.
8. Set the injected current to 200% of the operate level of the tested step, switch on the
current for txMin.
matrixes)
10. Reverse the direction of the injected current and check that the step does not operate.
11. Check that the protection does not operate when the polarizing voltage is zero.
12. Repeat the above described tests for the higher set steps.
13. Finally, check that start and trip information is stored in the event menu.
12.5.4.2 Four step non-directional earth fault protection SEMOD53296-202 v4
1. Do as described in "Four step directional earth fault protection", but without applying
any polarizing voltage.
purposes.
12.5.5 Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-EB1A8DFD-5BAC-4024-ADA2-D9BE7A2B50A0 v1
GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.
GUID-F973601F-BC67-4E4F-A4CA-BE6253E2FB92 v3
Procedure
157
1. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase currents and voltages to the
appropriate CT and VT inputs of the IED.
2. Inject pure negative sequence current, that is, phase currents with exactly same
magnitude, reversed sequence and exactly 120° phase displaced into the IED with an
initial value below negative sequence current pickup level. No output signals should be
activated. Check under NS4PTOC function Service Values that correct I2 magnitude is
measured by the function.
3. Set the injected negative sequence polarizing voltage slightly larger than the set
minimum polarizing voltage (default 5 % of Ub) and set the injection current to lag the
voltage by an angle equal to the set reference characteristic angle (180° - AngleRCA) if the
forward directional function is selected.
If reverse directional function is selected, set the injection current to lag the polarizing
voltage by an angle equal to RCA.
4. Increase the injected current and note the value at which the studied step of the function
operates.
6. Block lower set steps when testing higher set steps according to the instructions that
follow.
8. Set the injected current to 200% of the operate level of the tested step, switch on the
current in order to test parameter txmin.
matrixes)
10. Reverse the direction of the injected current and check that the step does not operate.
11. Check that the protection does not operate when the polarizing voltage is zero.
12. Repeat the above-described tests for the higher set steps.
13. Finally, check that start and trip information is stored in the event menu.
purposes.
12.5.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE SEMOD175060-3 v7
158
IED test set IED
NI NI
L1U U1
L2U U2
L3U U3
NU NU
TRIP
Figure 56: Principle connection of the test set

Values of the logical signals belonging to the sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection are available on the local HMI under Main menu/Test/Function status/
Current protection/SensDirResOvCurr(67N,IN>)/SDEPSDE(67N,IN>):x
12.5.6.1 Measuring the operate and time limit for set values SEMOD175060-12 v2
Operation mode 3I0 · cosφ

SEMOD175060-34 v9
Procedure
1. Set the polarizing voltage to 1.2 · UNRel> and set the phase angle between voltage and
current to the set characteristic angle (RCADir). Note that the the current lagging the
voltage.
Take setting RCAComp into consideration if not equal to 0.
2. Inject current until the function picks up, and make sure that the operate current of the
set directional element is equal to the INcosPhi> setting.
The I Dir (3I0 · cosφ) function activates the START and STDIRIN output.
3. Assume that φ´ is the phase angle between injected voltage (3U0) and current (3I0) i.e. φ
´ = RCADir-φ. Change φ´ to for example 45 degrees. Increase the injected current until
the function operates.
4. Compare the result with the set value and make sure that the new injected 3I0 · cos φ is
equal to the setting INcosPhi>..
Take the set characteristic into consideration, see Figure 57 and Figure 58.
5. Measure the operate time of the timer by injecting a current two times the set INcosPhi>
value and the polarizing voltage 1.2 · UNRel>.
kSN × Sref
Tinv =
3I 0 test × 3U 0 test × cos (j )
IECEQUATION2402 V2 EN-US (Equation 77)
6. Compare the result with the expected value.
159
The expected value depends on whether definite or inverse time was selected.
7. Set the polarizing voltage to zero and increase until the boolean output signal UNREL is
activated, which is visible in the Application Configuration in PCM600 when the IED is in
online mode. Compare the voltage with the set value UNRel> .
8. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to Off.
RCADir = 0o
3I0
Operate area
j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cos j
ROADir
Figure 57: Characteristic with ROADir restriction
160
RCADir = 0º
Operate area
-3U0 =Uref
Instrument
transformer
angle error 
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim) 3I0 (to prot)
Figure 58: Explanation of RCAcomp
Operation mode 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ

SEMOD175060-76 v8
current to the set characteristic angle (RCADir). Note that the current lagging the voltage.
2. Inject current until the function picks up, and make sure that the operate power is equal
to the SN> setting for the set directional element.
Note that for operation, both the injected current and voltage must be greater than the
set values INRel> and UNRel> respectively.
The function activates the START and STDIRIN outputs.
3. Assume that φ´ is the phase angle between injected voltage (3U0) and current (3I0) i.e. φ
´ = RCADir-φ. Change φ´ to for example 45 degrees. Increase the injected current until
the function operates.
4. Compare the result with the set value and make sure that the new injected 3I0 · 3U0 · cos
φ is equal to the setting SN>. Take the set characteristic into consideration, see figure 57
and figure 58.
5. Measure the operate time of the timer by injecting 1.2 · UNRel> and a current to get two
times the set SN> operate value.
Tinv = kSN × Sref / 3 I 0 test × 3U 0 test × cos (j )


161
Operation mode 3I0 and φ

SEMOD175060-87 v8
current to the set characteristic angle (RCADir). Note that the current lagging the voltage.
2. Inject current until the function picks up, and make sure that the operate current is equal
to the INDir> setting for the set directional element.
Note that for operation, both the injected current and voltage must be
greater than the set values INRel> and UNRel> respectively.
The function activates the START and STDIRIN output.

3. Measure with angles j around RCADir +/- ROADir.
4. Compare the result with the set values, refer to figure 59 for example characteristic.
5. Measure the operate time of the timer by injecting a current to get two times the set
SN_> operate value.
Tinv = kSN × Sref / 3 I 0 test × 3U 0 test × cos (j )


RCADir = 0º
ROADir = 80º
Operate area
3I0
-3U0
Figure 59: Example characteristic
Non-directional earth fault current protection SEMOD175060-117 v10

Procedure
1. Measure that the operate current is equal to the INNonDir> setting.

The function activates the START and STDIRIN output.
2. Measure the operate time of the timer by injecting a current of 200% of the operate
value.
162
The expected value depends on whether definite time tINNonDir or inverse time was
selected.
Residual overvoltage release and protection SEMOD175060-131 v6

Procedure
1. Measure that the operate voltage is equal to the UN> setting.

The function activates the START and STUN signals.
2. Measure the operate time by injecting a voltage 1.2 times set UN> operate value.
3. Compare the result with the set tUN operate value.
4. Inject a voltage 0.8 · UNRel> and a current high enough to operate the directional
function at the chosen angle.
5. Increase the voltage until the directional function is released.
6. Compare the measured value with the set UNRel> operate value.
purposes.
12.5.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/

Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR M14950-2 v7
Check that the input logical signal BLOCK is logical zero and that on the local HMI, the logical
signal TRIP, START and ALARM are equal to logical zero.
12.5.7.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values M14950-8 v3
Testing the protection without external temperature compensation (NonComp) M14950-10 v10
purposes.
12.5.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR SEMOD53632-3 v5
12.5.8.1 Checking operate and reset values SEMOD53632-11 v7
163
1. Connect symmetrical three-phase currents to the appropriate current terminals of the

IED.
2. Set the Time constant 1 (Tau1) and Time Constant 2 (Tau2) temporarily to 1 minute.
3. Set the three-phase injection currents slightly lower than the set operate value of stage
IBase1, increase the current in phase L1 until stage IBase1operates and note the operate
value.
Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the

IED.

Check, in the same way, the operate and reset values of IBase1 for phases L2 and L3.
5. Activate the cooling input signal, thus switching to base current IBase2.
6. Check the operate and reset values (for all three phases) for IBase2 in the same way as
described above for stage IBase1.
7. Deactivate the input signal for stage IBase2.
8. Set the time constant for IBase1 in accordance with the setting plan.
9. Set the injection current for phase L1 to 1.50 · IBase1.
10. Connect a trip output contact to the timer and monitor the output of contacts ALARM1
and ALARM2 to digital inputs in test equipment.
Read the heat content in the thermal protection from the local HMI and wait until the
content is zero.
11. Switch on the injection current and check that ALARM1 and ALARM2 contacts operate at
the set percentage level and that the operate time for tripping is in accordance with the
set Time Constant 1 (Tau1).
With setting Itr = 101%IBase1 and injection current 1.50 · IBase1, the trip time from zero
content in the memory shall be 0.60 · Time Constant 1 (Tau1).
12. Check that all trip and alarm contacts operate according to the configuration logic.
13. Switch off the injection current and check from the service menu readings of thermal
status and LOCKOUT that the lockout resets at the set percentage of heat content.
14. Activate the cooling input signal to switch over to base current IBase2.
Wait 5 minutes to empty the thermal memory and set Time Constant 2 (Tau2) in
accordance with the setting plan.
15. Test with injection current 1.50 · IBase2 the thermal alarm level, the operate time for
tripping and the lockout reset in the same way as described for stage IBase1.
16. Finally check that start and trip information is stored in the event menu.
purposes.
12.5.9 Breaker failure protection, phase segregated activation and

output CCRBRF M12104-2 v11
The Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output function CCRBRF should
normally be tested in conjunction with some other function that provides a start signal. An
external START signal can also be used.
To verify the settings in the most common back-up trip mode 1 out of 3, it is sufficient to test
phase-to-earth faults.
164
At mode 2 out of 4 the phase current setting, IP> can be checked by single-phase injection
where the return current is connected to the summated current input. The value of residual
(earth fault) current IN set lower than IP> is easiest checked in back-up trip mode 1 out of 4.
12.5.9.1 Checking the phase current operate value, IP> M12104-23 v12
The check of the IP> current level is best made in FunctionMode = Current and BuTripMode = 1
out of 3 or 2 out of 4.
1. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCRBRF, with a current below the set IP>.
2. Repeat the fault condition and increase the current in steps until a trip occurs.
3. Compare the result with the set IP>.
Note! If No CBPos Check or Retrip off is set, only back-up trip can be used to
check set IP>.
12.5.9.2 Checking the residual (earth fault) current operate value IN> set below
IP> M12104-80 v9
Check the low set IN> current where setting FunctionMode = Current and setting BuTripMode
= 1 out of 4
1. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCRBRF, with a current just below set IN>.
2. Repeat the fault condition and increase the current in steps until trip appears.
3. Compare the result with the set IN>.
4. Disconnect AC and START input signals.
12.5.9.3 Checking the re-trip and back-up times M12104-93 v10
The check of the set times can be made in connection with the check of operate values above.
Choose the applicable function and trip mode, such as FunctionMode = Current and
RetripMode = CB Pos Check .
1. Apply the fault condition, including start of CCRBRF, well above the set current value.
Measure the time from START of CCRBRF.
2. Check the re-trip t1 and back-up trip times t2 and t3.
In applicable cases, the back-up trip for multi-phase start t2MPh and back-up trip 2, t2
and t3 can also be checked. To check t2MPh, a two-phase or three-phase start shall be
applied.
12.5.9.4 Verifying the re-trip mode M12104-36 v6
Choose the mode below, which corresponds to the actual case.
In the cases below it is assumed that FunctionMode = Current is selected.
Checking the case without re-trip, RetripMode = Retrip Off M12104-107 v6
165
1. Set RetripMode = Retrip Off.

3. Verify that no re-trip, but back-up trip is achieved after set time.
Checking the re-trip with current check, RetripMode = CB Pos Check M12104-48 v6
1. Set RetripMode = CB Pos Check.

3. Verify that re-trip is achieved after set time t1 and back-up trip after time t2
4. Apply the fault condition, including the start of CCRBRF, with the current below the set
current value.
5. Verify that no re-trip, and no back-up trip is obtained.
Checking re-trip without current check M12104-58 v8
1. Set RetripMode = No CBPos Check.

3. Verify that re-trip is achieved after the set time t1, and the back-up trip after time t2.
4. Apply the fault condition, including start of CCRBRF, with current below set current value.
5. Verify that re-trip is achieved after set time t1, but no back-up trip is obtained.
12.5.9.5 Verifying the back-up trip mode M12104-146 v5
Checking that back-up tripping is not achieved at normal CB tripping M12104-150 v7

Use the actual tripping modes. The case below applies to re-trip with current check.
1. Apply the fault condition, including start of CCRBRF, with phase current well above set
value IP>.
2. Interrupt the current, with a margin before back-up trip time, t2. It may be made at issue
of re-trip command.
3. Check that re-trip is achieved, if selected, but no back-up trip is obtained.
The normal mode BuTripMode = 1 out of 3 should have been verified in the tests above. In
applicable cases the modes 1 out of 4 and 2 out of 4 can be checked. Choose the mode below,
which corresponds to the actual case.
Checking the case BuTripMode = 1 out of 4 M12104-165 v6

It is assumed that the earth-fault current setting IN> is below phase current setting IP>.
1. Set BuTripMode = 1 out of 4.

2. Apply the fault condition, including start of CCRBRF, with one-phase current below set
IP> but above IN>. The residual earth-fault should then be above set IN>.
3. Verify that back-up trip is achieved after set time. If selected, re-trip should also appear.
Checking the case BuTripMode = 2 out of 4 M12104-179 v7

The earth-fault current setting IN> may be equal to or below phase-current setting IP>.
1. Set BuTripMode = 2 out of 4.

2. Apply the fault condition, including start of CCRBRF, with one-phase current above set
IP> and residual (earth fault) above set IN>.
3. Verify that back-up trip is achieved after set time. If selected, re-trip should also appear.
166
4. Apply the fault condition, including start of CCRBRF, with at least one-phase current
below set IP> and residual (earth fault) above set IN>. The current may be arranged by
feeding three- (or two-) phase currents with equal phase angle (I0-component) below IP>,
but of such value that the residual (earth fault) current (3I0) will be above set value IN>.
5. Verify that back-up trip is not achieved.
12.5.9.6 Verifying instantaneous back-up trip at CB faulty condition M12104-197 v6
Applies in a case where a signal from CB supervision function regarding CB being faulty and
unable to trip is connected to input CBFLT.
1. Repeat the check of back-up trip time. Disconnect current and START input signals.
2. Activate the input CBFLT. The output CBALARM (CB faulty alarm) should appear after set
time tCBAlarm. Keep the input activated.
3. Apply the fault condition, including start of CCRBRF, with current above set current value.
4. Verify that back-up trip is obtained without intentional delay, for example within 20ms
from application of start.
12.5.9.7 Verifying the case RetripMode = Contact M12104-213 v9
It is assumed that re-trip without current check is selected, RetripMode = Contact.
1. Set FunctionMode = Contact

2. Apply input signal for CB closed to relevant input or inputs CBCLDL1, CBCLD2 or CBCDL3.
3. Apply the input signal, or signals for the start of CCRBRF.
4. Verify that phase selection re-trip and back-up trip are achieved after set times.
5. Disconnect the start signal(s). Keep the CB closed signal(s).
6. Apply input signal(s), for start of CCRBRF.
7.
8. Arrange disconnection of CB closed signal(s) well before set back-up trip time t2.
12.5.9.8 Verifying the function mode Current&Contact M12104-237 v5
To be made only when FunctionMode = Current&Contact is selected. It is suggested to make

the tests in one phase only, or at three-phase trip applications for just three-phase tripping.
Checking the case with fault current above set value IP> M12104-241 v6
The operation shall be as in FunctionMode = Current.
1. Set FunctionMode = Current&Contact.

2. Leave the inputs for CB close inactivated. These signals should not influence.
3. Apply the fault condition, including the start of CCRBRF, with the current above the set
IP> value.
4. Check that the re-trip, if selected, and back-up trip commands are achieved.
Checking the case with fault current below set value I>BlkCont M12104-281 v9
The case shall simulate a case where the fault current is very low and operation will depend on
CB position signal from CB auxiliary contact. It is suggested that re-trip without current check
is used, setting RetripMode = No CBPos Check.
167
1. Set FunctionMode = Current&Contact.

2. Apply input signal for CB closed to the relevant input or inputs CBCLDL1 (2 or 3).
3. Apply the fault condition with input signal(s) for start of CCRBRF. The value of current
should be below the set value I>BlkCont.
4. Verify that phase selection re-trip (if selected) and back-up trip are achieved after set
times. Failure to trip is simulated by keeping the signal(s) CB closed activated.
5. Disconnect the input signal and the START signal(s). Keep the CB closed signal(s).
6. Apply the fault and the start again. The value of current should be below the set value
I>BlkCont.
7. Arrange disconnection of BC closed signal(s) well before set back-up trip time t2. It
simulates a correct CB tripping.
8. Verify that back-up trip is not achieved. Re-trip can appear for example, due to selection
“Re-trip without current check”.
purposes.
12.5.10 Breaker failure protection, single phase version CCSRBRF SEMOD128582-3 v4
The breaker failure protection, single phase version function CCSRBRF should normally be
tested in conjunction with some other function that provides a START signal. An external
START signal can also be used.
CCSRBRF has to be set and configured before the testing can start. CCSRBRF is highly flexible
in that it permits a choice of functional and tripping modes. The various modes are checked at
the factory as part of the design verification. In certain cases only modes with a high
probability of coming into operation need to be checked, in order to verify the configuration
and settings.
Testing requirements
• Calculated settings
• Valid configuration diagram for the IED
• Valid terminal diagram for the IED
• Technical reference manual
• Single phase test equipment
The technical reference manual contains application and functionality summaries, function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, a list of setting parameters and technical
data for the function.
The test equipment should be able to provide a single phase supply of currents. The
magnitude of currents should be possible to vary.
Make sure the IED is prepared for test before starting the test session. Consider the logic
diagram of the function when performing the test. The response from a test can be viewed in
different ways:
• Binary output signals

• Service values in the local HMI (logical signal or phasors)
• A PC with PCM600 (configuration software) in debug mode
168
12.5.10.1 Checking the phase current operate value IP> SEMOD128582-25 v6
Procedure
1. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCSRBRF, with a current below set IP>.
2. Repeat the fault condition and increase the current in steps until a trip occurs.
3. Compare the result with the set IP>.
4. Disconnect the AC and start input signals.
Note! If “No CBPos Check” or “Retrip off” is set, only back-up trip can be
used to check set IP>.
12.5.10.2 Checking the re-trip and back-up times SEMOD128582-54 v5
The check of the set times can be made in connection with the check of operate values above.
Choose the applicable function and trip mode, such as FunctMode = Current and RetripMode =
CB Pos Check .
Procedure
1. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCSRBRF, well above the set current value.
Measure time from “Start of CCSRBRF”.
2. Check the re-trip t1 and back-up trip times t2 and t3
3. Disconnect AC and start input signals.
12.5.10.3 Verifying the re-trip mode SEMOD128582-67 v2
Choose the mode below, which corresponds to the actual case. In the cases below it is
assumed that FunctionMode = Current is selected.
Checking the case without re-trip, RetripMode = Retrip Off SEMOD128582-71 v5

Procedure
1. Set RetripMode = Retrip Off.

3. Verify that no re-trip, but back-up trip is achieved after set time.
Checking the re-trip with current check, RetripMode = CB Pos Check SEMOD128582-83 v4
Procedure
1. Set RetripMode = CB Pos Check .

3. Verify that retrip is achieved after set time t1 and back-up trip after time t2
4. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCSRBRF, with current below set current
value.
5. Verify that no re-trip, and no back-up trip is obtained.
Checking re-trip without current check, RetripMode = No CBPos Check SEMOD128582-99 v5

Procedure
169
1. Set RetripMode = No CBPos Check.

3. Verify that re-trip is achieved after set time t1, and back-up trip after time t2.
4. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCSRBRF, with current below set current
value.
5. Verify that re-trip is achieved after set timet1, but no back-up trip is obtained.
12.5.10.4 Verifying the back-up trip mode SEMOD128582-115 v2
Checking that back-up tripping is not achieved at normal CB tripping SEMOD128582-119 v4

Use the actual tripping modes. The case below applies to re-trip with current check.
Procedure
1. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCSRBRF, with phase current well above set
value IP>.
2. Arrange switching the current off, with a margin before back-up trip time, t2. It may be
made at issue of re-trip command.
3. Check that re-trip is achieved, if selected, but no back-up trip.
12.5.10.5 Verifying instantaneous back-up trip at “CB faulty” condition SEMOD128582-167 v4
Applies in a case where signal “CB faulty and unable to trip” is connected to input CBFLT.
Procedure
1. Repeat the check of back-up trip time. Disconnect current and START input signals.
2. Activate the input CBFLT. The output CBALARM (CB faulty alarm) should appear after set
time tCBAlarm. Keep the input activated.
3. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCSRBRF, with current above set current
value.
4. Verify that back-up trip is obtained without intentional delay, for example, within 20ms
from application of START.
5. Disconnect injected AC and input signals.
12.5.10.6 Verifying the case FunctionMode = Contact SEMOD128582-183 v4
It is assumed that re-trip without current check is selected, RetripMode = No CBPos Check.
Procedure
1. Set FunctionMode = Contact.

2. Apply input signal for CB closed to relevant input or inputs CBCLD
3. Apply input signal, or signals for START of CCSRBRF. The value of current could be low.
4. Verify that re-trip and back-up trip are achieved after set times.
5. Disconnect the START signal(s). Keep the CB closed signal(s).
6. Apply input signal(s), for START of CCSRBRF. The value of current could be low.
7. Arrange disconnection of CB closed signal(s) well before set back-up trip time t2.
9. Disconnect injected AC and START input signals.
170
12.5.10.7 Verifying the function mode Curr&Cont Check SEMOD128582-207 v3
To be made only when FunctionMode = Current&Contact is selected. It is suggested to make

the tests in one phase only, or at three-phase trip applications for just three-phase tripping.
Checking the case with fault current above set value SEMOD128582-211 v6
The operation shall be as in FunctionMode = Current.
Set
RetripMode = CB Pos Check .

Procedure
1. Set FunctionMode = Current/Contact.

2. Leave the input for CB close inactivated. This signal should not influence. Leave the
inputs for CB close inactivated. These signals should not influence.
3. Apply the fault condition, including START of CCSRBRF, with current above the set IP>
value.
4. Check that the re-trip, if selected, and back-up trip commands are achieved.
Checking the case with fault current below set value SEMOD128582-227 v6
The case shall simulate a case where the fault current is very low and operation will depend on
CB position signal from CB auxiliary contact. It is suggested that re-trip without current check
is used; setting RetripMode = No CBPos Check.
Procedure
1. Set FunctionMode = Current/Contact.

2. Apply input signal for CB closed to relevant input CBCLD.Apply input signal for CB closed
to relevant input or inputs CBCLD.
3. Apply the fault condition with input signal(s) for START of CCSRBRF. The value of current
should be below the set value I>BlkCont
4. Verify that re-trip (if selected) and back-up trip are achieved after set times. Failure to
trip is simulated by keeping the signal CB closed activated.Failure to trip is simulated by
keeping the signals CB closed activated.
5. Disconnect the AC and the START signals. Keep the CB closed signal.Disconnect the AC
and the START signals. Keep the CB closed signals.
6. Apply the fault and the START again. The value of current should be below the set value
I>BlkCont
7. Arrange disconnection of BC closed signal well before set back-up trip time t2.Arrange
disconnection of BC closed signals well before set back-up trip time t2. It simulates a
correct CB tripping.
8. Verify that back-up trip is not achieved. Re-trip can appear, for example, due to selection
RetripMode = No CBPos Check.
purposes.
12.5.11 Stub protection STBPTOC M14922-2 v7
171
Logical signals for STBPTOC protection are available on the local HMI underMain menu/
Settings/Setting group N/Current protection/Stub(PTOC,50STB)/STBPTOC:x
12.5.11.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values M14922-6 v8
1. Check that the input logical signals BLOCK and RELEASE and the output logical signal
TRIP are all logical zero.
2. Activate the input RELEASE on the STBPTOC function block
3. For a short while inject a current (fault current) in one phase to about 110% of the set
operating current, and switch the current off.
IED.
4. Switch the fault current on and measure the operating time of STBPTOC.
Use the TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer. The operation
should be instantaneously.
5. Activate the input BLOCK on the STBPTOC function block.
6. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting).
No TRIP signal should appear.
7. Switch off the fault current.
8. For a short while inject a current (fault current) in same phase to about 90% of the set
operating current, and switch the current off.
9. Switch the fault current on.
11. Reset the RELEASE binary input.
12. Switch the fault current on.
purposes.
12.5.12 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC SEMOD55625-59 v6
1. External detection logic, Contact function selection = ContSel setting equals CCPDSC
signal from CB. Activate the EXTPDIND binary input, and measure the operating time of
CCPDSC.
Use the TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.
2. Compare the measured time with the set value tTrip.
3. Reset the EXTPDIND input.
4. Activate the BLKDBYAR binary input.
This test should be performed together with Autorecloser SMBRREC.
5. Activate the EXTPDIND binary input.
6. Reset both BLKDBYAR and EXTPDIND binary inputs.
172
7. Activate the BLOCK binary input.

8. Activate EXTPDIND binary input.
NO TRIP signal should appear.
9. Reset both BLOCK and EXTPDIND binary inputs.
10. If Internal detection logic Contact function selection = ContSel setting equals Pole
position from auxiliary contacts. Then set inputs POLE1OPN...POLE3CL in a status that
activates the pole discordance logic and repeats step 2 to step 6.
11. Unsymmetrical current detection with CB monitoring: Set measured current in one phase
to 110% of current release level. Activate CLOSECMD and measure the operating time of
the CCPDSC protection.
12. Deactivate the CLOSECMD: Set measured current in one phase to 90% of Current Release
level. Activate CLOSECMD.
13. Repeat the previous two steps using OPENCMD instead of CLOSECMD. Asymmetry
current detection with CB monitoring: Set all three currents to 110% of Current Release
level. Activate CLOSECMD.
NO TRIP signal should appear due to symmetrical condition.
14. Deactivate the CLOSECMD. Decrease one current with 120% of the current unsymmetrical
level compared to the other two phases. Activate CLOSECMD and measure the operating
time of the CCPDSC protection.
15. Deactivate the CLOSECMD. Decrease one current with 80% of the current unsymmetrical
level compared to the other two phases. Activate CLOSECMD.
purposes.
12.5.13 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP SEMOD175027-3 v5
The underpower protection shall be set to values according to the real set values to be used.
The test is made by means of injection of voltage and current where the amplitude of both
current and voltage and the phase angle between the voltage and current can be controlled.
During the test, the analog outputs of active and reactive power shall be monitored.
1. Connect the test set for injection of voltage and current corresponding to the mode to
be used in the application. If a three-phase test set is available this could be used for all
the modes. If a single-phase current/voltage test set is available the test set should be
connected to a selected input for one-phase current and voltage.
173
Table 32: Calculation modes

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
2. Adjust the injected current and voltage to the set values in % of IBase and UBase
(converted to secondary current and voltage). The angle between the injected current
and voltage shall be set equal to the set direction Angle1, angle for stage 1 (equal to 0° for
low forward power protection and equal to 180° for reverse power protection). Check
that the monitored active power is equal to 100% of rated power and that the reactive
power is equal to 0% of rated power.
3. Change the angle between the injected current and voltage to Angle1 + 90°. Check that
the monitored active power is equal to 0% of rated power and that the reactive power is
equal to 100% of rated power.
4. Change the angle between the injected current and voltage back to 0°. Decrease the
current slowly until the START1 signal, start of stage 1, is activated.
5. Increase the current to 100% of IBase.
6. Switch the current off and measure the time for activation of TRIP1, trip of stage 1.
7. If a second stage is used, repeat steps 2 to 6 for the second stage.
174
purposes.
12.5.14 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP SEMOD175058-3 v5
The overpower protection shall be set to values according to the real set values to be used. The
test is made by means of injection of voltage and current where the amplitude of both current
and voltage and the phase angle between the voltage and current can be controlled. During the
test the analog outputs of active and reactive power shall be monitored.
1. Connect the test set for injection of voltage and current corresponding to the mode to
be used in the application. If a three phase test set is available this could be used for all
the modes. If a single phase current/voltage test set is available the test set should be
connected to a selected input for one phase current and voltage.
2. Adjust the injected current and voltage to the set rated values in % of IBase and UBase
(converted to secondary current and voltage). The angle between the injected current
and voltage shall be set equal to the set direction Angle1, angle for stage 1 (equal to 0° for
low forward power protection and equal to 180° for reverse power protection). Check
that the monitored active power is equal to 100% of rated power and that the reactive
power is equal to 0% of rated power.
3. Change the angle between the injected current and voltage to Angle1 + 90°. Check that
the monitored active power is equal to 0% of rated power and that the reactive power is
equal to 100% of rated power.
4. Change the angle between the injected current and voltage back to Angle1 value. Increase
the current slowly from 0 until the START1 signal, start of stage 1, is activated. Check the
injected power and compare it to the set value Power1, power setting for stage 1 in % of
Sbase.
5. Increase the current to 100% of IBase and switch the current off.
6. Switch the current on and measure the time for activation of TRIP1, trip of stage 1.
7. If a second stage is used, repeat steps 2 to 6 for the second stage.
purposes.
12.5.15 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD175021-3 v5
12.5.15.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values SEMOD175021-7 v6
175
1. Check that the input logical signal BLOCK to the BRCPTOC function block is logical zero
and note on the local HMI that the output signal TRIP from the BRCPTOC function block is
equal to the logical 0.
2. Set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to about 110% of the set operating
current IP>.
terminal.
3. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of BRCPTOC.
TRIP is controlled by Gate 13 in the configuration.
4. Compare the measured time with the set value tOper.
6. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value tOper.
8. Set the measured current (fault current) in same phase to about 90% of the set operating
current IP>. Switch off the current.
9. Switch on the fault current and wait longer than the set value tOper.
purposes.
12.5.16 Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines

NS2PTOC GUID-48A6DA1D-5CF5-4C1B-B1A4-3F2C73851FD4 v2
GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.
12.5.16.1 Verifying settings by secondary injection GUID-EB788169-532A-4A3E-BBEC-DCB28169DF86 v6
1. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase currents to the appropriate current
terminals of the IED.
2. Go to Main menu/Settings/Setting group n/Current protection/
NegSeqOverCurr2Step/NSOn/General and make sure that the function is enabled, that
is Operation is set to On.
3. Inject current into IEDs in such a way that negative sequence component is created and
then verify that negative sequence component of the injected currents is calculated
correctly by the function. See example below for 1 A rated current transformer.
4. Inject pure negative sequence current, that is, phase currents with exactly same
magnitude, reversed sequence and exactly 120° phase displaced into the IED with an
initial value below negative sequence current start level. No output signals should be
activated.
Note: If it is difficult to obtain pure negative sequence current for the secondary injection
test, a current corresponding to the two phase short-circuit condition can be used. A two
176
phase short-circuit gives a negative sequence current of a magnitude: magnitude =

(1/√3) · fault current.
5. Increase the injected current and note the value at which the step 1 of the function
operates. Start signal ST1 must be activated when amplitude of the negative sequence
current lies slightly above the start level I2-1>. Corresponding trip signals TR1 and TRIP is
activated after the pre-set time delay has expired.
Note: Block or disable operation of step 2 when testing step 1 if the injected current
activates the step 2.
8. Set the current to 200% of the start level of the step 1, switch on the current and check
the definite time delay for trip signals TR1 and TRIP. Once the measured negative
sequence current exceeds the set start level I2-1>, the settable definite timer t1 starts to
count and trip signals is released after the set time delay has elapsed. The same test
must be carried out to check the accuracy of definite time delay for ALARM signal.
Note: The output ALARM is operated by START signal.
9. If inverse time is selected the trip signals TR1 and TRIP operates after a time
corresponding to the formula:
 1 
  I 2 − 1 > 2 
   
t [s] = 
 100  ⋅K
 ( Multiple of Start )2 
 
 
 
This means that if current jumps from 0 to 2 times start and negative sequence
capability value of generator K1 is set to 10 s and current start level I2-1> is set to 10% of
rated generator current, then TR1 and TRIP signals operates at time equal to 250 sec ±
tolerance.
10. Repeat the above-described tests for the step 2 of the function excluding the inverse
time testing.
Example
CTprim
The CT ratios CT sec for all three phases is 1000 A, IBase is 1000 A, and the following
secondary currents are applied:
IL1 Ampl = 1.1 A Angl = 15 deg

IL2 Ampl = 0.6 A Angl = 97 deg
IL3 Ampl = 1.3 A Angl = -135 deg
The service value output NSCURR indicating amplitude of negative sequence current in
primary amperes should be 962A approximative.
12.5.16.2 Completing the test GUID-DA67F057-00AD-4391-B50E-047FD6C16EBB v1
Continue to test another functions or end the test by changing the Test mode setting to Off.
purposes. Make sure that all built-in features for this function, which shall be in operation, are
enabled and with correct settings.
177
12.5.17 Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator

AEGPVOC GUID-6E141754-28E5-408D-955F-899720BA59E0 v2
Prepare the IED for verification of settings outlined in section "Requirements" and section "Preparing
for test" in this chapter.
12.5.17.1 Verifying the settings GUID-B834BA0F-E8CE-4B08-9FCE-B6D2813D3197 v3
1. Connect the test set for three-phase current injection and for three phase voltage
injection to the appropriate IED terminals.
2. Inject zero voltage to the IED.
3. Increase the injected symmetric three phase current slowly and note the operated value
(start value) of the studied step of the function.
7. Check that all trip and start contacts operate according to the configuration (signal
matrises).
9. Inject rated symmetric three phase voltage to the IED.
current. The function does not start and trip.
11. Inject 95% of the set ArmU< value symmetric three-phase voltage to the IED.
current. The function does start and trip.
12.5.18 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC GUID-764DA61A-D987-4358-867A-DA43ADDC6E57 v5
12.5.18.1 Verifying the settings GUID-3A2B7FF5-330E-4A0D-AB74-EBAE6258C176 v1
Verifying settings by secondary injection GUID-39632D30-A8D8-417D-985C-8F886106783E v4
1. Connect the test set for three-phase current injection and three-phase voltage injection
to the appropriate IED terminals.
2. Go to Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Current protection/VoltageRestOverCurr
( 51V,2(I>/U<))/VRPVOC (51V,2(I>/U<)):1/General and make sure that the function is
enabled, that is, Operation is set to On.
3. The test of the function may be performed by injecting restrain voltage and increasing
the injected current(s). Note the value at which the START and STOC signals are set.
In the following equations, restrain voltage is the magnitude of the

minimum phase-to-phase voltage in secondary volts.
The set operate value in secondary amperes is calculated according to the following
equations:
First part of the characteristic (Restrain voltage ≤ 25% of UBase):
178
StartCurr CT sec VDepFact

× IBase × ×
100 CTprim 100
Second part of the characteristic (25% of UBase ≤ Restrain voltage ≤ UHighLimit/

100*UBase), valid when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope:
  StartCurr CT sec   VDepFact  
 × IBase ×  × 1 −  
  100 CTprim   100  
×  RestrainVoltage −
25
× UBase ×
VT sec    StartCurr
× IBase ×
CT sec VDepFact 
 + × 
 (UHighLimit − 25) × UBase × VT sec  100 VTprim    100 CTprim 100 
 
 100 VTprim 
Third part of the characteristic (UHighLimit/100*UBase ≤ Restrain voltage):
StartCurr CT sec
× IBase ×
100 CTprim
Example (rated secondary current = 1A):
CT ratio 10 000/1A
VT ratio 10 kV/100 V
StartCurr 100%
VDepFact 25%
UHighLimit 100%
IBase 10 000 A
10 kV
A test for each section of the characteristic of the function VRPVOC may be performed;
that may be achieved by applying the following voltages:
First section of the characteristic:
If VDepMode = Slope, the minimum measured phase-to-phase voltage is lower than
0,25*UBase; if VDepMode = Step, the minimum measured phase-to-phase voltage is
lower than UHighLimit/100*UBase:
• UL1: Ampl = 10 / √3; Angle = 0°
• UL2: Ampl = 10 / √3; Angle = 240°
• UL3: Ampl = 100 / √3; Angle = 120°
Second section of the characteristic only:

If VDepMode = Slope, the minimum measured phase-to-phase voltage is between
0,25*UBase and UHighLimit/100*UBase:
• UL1: Ampl = 50 / √3; Angle = 0°
• UL2: Ampl = 50 / √3; Angle = 240°
• UL3: Ampl = 100 / √3; Angle = 120°
Last section of the characteristic:

If VDepMode = either Slope or Step, the minimum measured phase-to-phase voltage is
higher than UHighLimit/100*UBase:
• UL1: Ampl = 105/ √3; Angle = 0°
• UL2: Ampl = 105/ √3; Angle = 240°
• UL3: Ampl = 105 / √3; Angle = 120°
4. Inject the voltages that are related to the first part of the characteristic, and then slowly
increase the phase current IL1 from 0.0 A up to the value the function operates. The
START and STOC signals must be activated when the amplitude of the phase current IL1
179
is slightly above 0.25 A on the secondary side. The corresponding trip signals TROC and
TRIP will be activated after the pre-set time delay has expired.
5. Decrease the current IL1 slowly and note the reset value.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 applying voltages that are related to the second and the last
section of the characteristic; the function operates when IL1 is slightly higher than: 0.5 A
in the second section; 1A in the last section.
7. Connect the trip output contact to the input channel of the test set in order to stop the
injection and measure the trip time.
8. If definite time delay is used for the overcurrent step, set the setting Characterist = IEC
Def. Time. Apply the voltages related to the last part of the characteristic and inject a
current IL1 200% higher than the set operation level, and check the definite time delay for
trip (the signals TROC and TRIP of the protection function VRPVOC are active in trip
condition).
9. If inverse time delay is used for the overcurrent step, the parameter setting Characterist
shall be properly set; we can refer, for example, to the setting IEC Very inv.; If the IEC Very
inverse time characteristic is selected, the trip signals TROC and TRIP will operate after a
time defined by the equation:
13.5 * k
t [s] =
 I 
  −1
 StartCurr 
where:
t Operate time in seconds
I Measured value (for example, phase current)
StartCurr Set operate value
This means that if the measured phase current jumps from 0 to 2 times the set operate
level and time multiplier k is set to 1.0 s (default value), then the TROC and TRIP signals
will operate after a time delay equal to 13.5 s ± tolerance.
Taking into account the above explanation, inject the voltages related to the last part of
the characteristic and inject a current IL1 200% higher than the set operation level, and
check the trip time delay.
If tDef_OC is set to a value different from 0 s, then this time delay is

added to the one that is defined by the IDMT characteristic.
10. Check the start and operate information that are stored in the event menu.
11. The previous step 8 or 9 may be repeated also for the first and second section of the
characteristic.
12. Supply the IED with symmetric three-phase voltages at their rated values. Go to Main
menu/Settings/IED Settings/Current protection/VoltageRestOverCurr(51V,2(I>/U<))/
VRPVOC(51V,2(I>/U<)):1/Undervoltage and set the setting Operation_UV = On to
activate the undervoltage stage.
13. Slowly decrease the voltage in two phases simultaneously, until the STUV and START
signals appear.
14. Note the operate value. The set operate value in secondary volts is calculated according
to the following equation:
StartVolt UBase VT sec

× ×
100 3 VTprim
180
If the VRPVOC function is used as an overcurrent protection with

undervoltage seal-in, it is necessary to first inject sufficient current to
activate the STOC signal before the under-voltage step is allowed to
operate. In order to achieve that, apply symmetric three-phase voltages at
their rated value and then inject a current IL1 that is 200% higher than the
set operation level. Then slowly decrease the voltage in two phases
simultaneously, until the STUV and START signals appear.
15. Increase slowly the applied voltages of the previous two phases and note the reset value.
16. Check that the trip output of the relay is connected to the input channel of the test in
order to stop the injection and measure the trip time.
17. Inject symmetric three-phase voltages at their rated value and check that the STUV and
START signals reset as well as the trip signals of the function block (TRIP and TRUV).
18. Instantaneously decrease the voltage in two phases simultaneously to a value 20% lower
than the set operate value (take into account the previous note if VRPVOC is configured
in ACT with the undervoltage seal-in feature).
19. Measure the definite time delay for the TRUV and TRIP signals and compare it with the
set value tDef_UV.
20. Check that start and operate information is stored in the event menu.
12.5.18.2 Completing the test GUID-8A33AACE-7B89-4981-A872-78044BB1FD0D v2
purposes.
12.5.19 Generator stator overload protection GSPTTR GUID-A0B3EA43-7EEC-4FCC-A5BF-44BB8A8055E0 v1
12.5.19.1 Verifying the settings GUID-6B85A379-E977-48CC-B15C-4AF3EAB78478 v2
Explained testing method is given for default value for the k1 parameter.
The function has heating content memory features. Thus if testing shots are done
consecutively, operate time will be shorten accordingly, compared to the given operate
characteristic. Therefore either wait until set tReset time has elapsed, between two shots, or
reset this memory by setting the RESET input into the function to value TRUE
1. Connect the test set for the appropriate three-phase current injection to the IED phases
L1, L2 and L3. The protection shall be fed with a symmetrical three-phase current.
2. Set the injected current to 116% of IBase, switch on the current and check operate time of
the trip, 120 s.
3. Decrease the current slowly.
4. The output signal START will reset if the measured current falls below reset level or if
BLOCK signal is set to one.
5. Switch off the current.
6. Set the injected current to 120% of IBase, switch on the current and check operate time
of the trip, 60 s.
of the trip, 30 s.
181
of the trip, 10 s.
12.5.19.2 Completing the test GUID-F79CE91E-7F07-45F4-8CDC-D7426CA9CBEA v2
Continue to test another function or end the test by changing the Test mode setting to Off.
12.5.20 Generator rotor overload protection GRPTTR GUID-4BEA4A9E-AEE1-4E4E-9D7C-ABA3499EB431 v1
12.5.20.1 Verifying the settings GUID-2AF96028-B49E-4820-BD3D-4957E75B9C2D v2
Explained testing method is given for default value for the k1 parameter.
The function has heating content memory features. Thus if testing shots are done
consecutively, operate time will be shortened accordingly, compared to the given operate
characteristic. Therefore, either wait until set tReset time has elapsed, between two shots, or
reset this memory by setting the RESET input into the function to value TRUE.
Precautions if MeasurCurrent = DC. The magnitude of the injected current have to be

decreased by multiplying it with a factor of 0.741 in order to get correct operate times when
testing with three-phase symmetrical sinusoidal currents.
1. Connect the test set for the appropriate three-phase current injection to the IED phases
L1, L2 and L3. The protection shall be fed with a symmetrical three-phase current.
2. Set the injected current to 113% of IBase, switch on the current and check operate time of
the trip, 120 s.
3. Decrease the current slowly.
4. The output signal START will reset if the measured current falls below reset level or if
BLOCK signal is set to one.
of the trip, 60 s.
of the trip, 30 s.
of the trip, 10 s.
12. Set the injected current to 100% of IBase and switch on the current.
13. Decrease the current slowly under I<.
14. The signal TRIPUC will be activated when timer tTrip_I< expires.
Testing the protection GUID-6E4609B9-62AB-453D-8FCE-59F9F41AB59D v1
12.5.20.2 Completing the test GUID-B4B2C5EF-DA21-4E89-874E-DD94D52D904B v2
182
12.6 Voltage protection SEMOD53540-1 v1
12.6.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV M13796-2 v6
Verification of START value and time delay to operate for Step 1 M13796-29 v9
1. Check that the IED settings are appropriate, especially the START value, the definite time
delay and the 1 out of 3 operation mode.
2. Supply the IED with three-phase voltages at their rated values.
3. Slowly decrease the voltage in one of the phases, until the START signal appears.
4. Note the operate value and compare it with the set value.
The operate value in secondary volts is calculated according to the

following equations:
For phase-to-earth measurement:
U1 < UBase VT sec

× ×
100 3 VTprim
For phase-to-phase measurement:
U1 < VT sec
× UBase ×
100 VTprim
5. Increase the measured voltage to rated load conditions.
6. Check that the START signal resets.
7. Instantaneously decrease the voltage in one phase to a value about 20% lower than the
measured operate value.
8. Measure the time delay for the TRIP signal, and compare it with the set value.
9. Check the inverse time delay by injecting a voltage corresponding to 0.8 × U1<.
For example, if the inverse time curve A is selected, the trip signals TR1
and TRIP operate after a time corresponding to the equation:
k1
t (s ) =
 U 
 1 − U1 < 
 
where:
t(s) Operate time in seconds
183
k1 Settable time multiplier of the function for step 1

U Measured voltage
U1< Set start voltage for step 1
For example, if the measured voltage jumps from the rated value to 0.8 times the set
start voltage level and time multiplier k1 is set to 0.05 s (default value), then the TR1 and
TRIP signals operate at a time equal to 0.250 s ± tolerance.
10. The test above can be repeated to check the inverse time characteristic at different
voltage levels.
11. Repeat the above-described steps for Step 2 of the function.
Extended testing M13796-35 v8

The tests above can be repeated for 2 out of 3 and for 3 out of 3 operation mode.
purposes.
12.6.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV M13806-2 v6
Verification of single-phase voltage and time delay to operate for Step 1 M13806-50 v8
1. Apply single-phase voltage below the set value U1>.

2. Slowly increase the voltage until the ST1 signal appears.
3. Note the operate value and compare it with the set value U1>.
The operate value in secondary volts is calculated according to the

following equations:
For phase-to-earth measurement:
U1 > UBase VT sec

× ×
100 3 VTprim
For phase-to-phase measurement:
U1 > VT sec
× UBase ×
100 VTprim
4. Decrease the voltage slowly and note the reset value.
5. Set and apply about 20% higher voltage than the measured operate value for one phase.
6. Measure the time delay for the TR1 signal and compare it with the set value.
184
7. Check the inverse time delay by injecting a voltage corresponding to 1.2 × U1>.
8. Repeat the test to check the inverse time characteristic at different over-voltage levels.
9. Repeat the above-described steps for Step 2 of the function.
12.6.2.2 Extended testing GUID-BE4B4A36-CCEE-4020-B7DC-6A83A43D11F5 v2
1. The tests above can be repeated for 2 out of 3 and for 3 out of 3 operation mode.
purposes.
12.6.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV SEMOD54358-3 v6
1. Apply a single-phase voltage either to a single-phase voltage input or to a residual

voltage input with the start value below the set value U1>.
2. Slowly increase the value until ST1 appears.
4. Decrease the voltage slowly and note the reset value.
5. Set and apply a 20% higher voltage than the measured operate value for one phase.
6. Measure the time delay for the TR1 signal and compare it with the set value.
7. Check the inverse time delay by injecting a voltage corresponding to 1.2 × U1>.
For example, if the inverse time curve A is selected, the trip signals TR1
and TRIP operate after a time corresponding to the equation:
k1
t (s ) =
 U 
 U1 > − 1
 
where:
t(s) Operate time in seconds
k1 Settable time multiplier of the function for step 1
U Measured voltage
U1> Set start voltage for step 1
8. Repeat the test for Step 2 of the function.
185
purposes.
12.6.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH M6583-45 v5

12.6.4.1
Verifying the settings
M6583-49 v4
1. Enable function.
2. Connect a symmetrical three-phase voltage input from the test set to the appropriate
connection terminals of the overexcitation protection OEXPVPH is configured for a three-
phase voltage input.
A single-phase injection voltage is applied if the function is configured for a phase-to-
phase voltage input.
OEXPVPH is conveniently tested using rated frequency for the injection voltage and
increasing the injection voltage to get the desired overexcitation level.
3. Connect the alarm contact to the timer and set the time delay tAlarm temporarily to zero.
4. Increase the voltage and note the operate value V/Hz>.
5. Reduce the voltage slowly and note the reset value.
6. Set the alarm time delay to the correct value according to the setting plan and check the
time delay, injecting a voltage corresponding to 1.2 · V/Hz>.
7. Connect a trip output contact to the timer and temporarily set the time delay tMin to
0.5s.
8. Increase the voltage and note the V/Hz>> operate value
9. Reduce the voltage slowly and note the reset value.
10. Set the time delay to the correct value according to the setting plan and check the time
delay tMin, injecting a voltage corresponding to 1.2 · V/Hz>>.
11. Check that trip and alarm contacts operate according to the configuration logic.
12. Set the cooling time constant temporarily to min value (1min.) to quickly lower the
thermal content.
13. Wait for a period equal to 6 times Tcooling switch 20 minutes on a voltage 1.15 · V/Hz>
and check the inverse operate time.
Wait until the thermal memory is emptied, set the cooling time constant according to the
setting plan and check another point on the inverse time curve injecting a voltage 1.3 · V/
Hz>.
14. Finally check that START and TRIP information is stored in the event menu.
purposes.
12.6.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV SEMOD175258-3 v2
186
12.6.5.1 Check of undervoltage levels SEMOD175258-71 v2
This test is relevant if the setting BlkDiffAtULow = Yes.
Check of U1Low SEMOD175258-75 v3

Procedure
1. Connect voltages to the IED according to valid connection diagram and figure 60.
2. Apply voltage higher than the highest set value of UDTrip, U1Low and U2Low to the U1
three-phase inputs and to one phase of the U2 inputs according to figure 60.
The voltage differential START signal is set.
UL1 UL1
IED TEST SET
UL2 UL2 1
UL3 UL3
IED
UN UN
UL1
UL2 2
UL3
Figure 60: Connection of the test set to the IED for test of U1 block level
where:
1 is three-phase voltage group1 (U1)
3. Decrease slowly the voltage in phase UL1 of the test set until the START signal resets.
4. Check U1 blocking level by comparing the voltage level at reset with the set undervoltage
blocking U1Low.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to check U1Low for the other phases.
The connections to U1 must be shifted to test another phase. (UL1 to UL2,

UL2 to UL3, UL3 to UL1)
Check of U2Low SEMOD175258-91 v3

Procedure
187
UL1 UL1
IED TEST SET

UL2 UL2 1
UL3 UL3
IED
UN UN
UL1
UL2 2
UL3
Figure 61: Connection of the test set to the IED for test of U2 block level
where:
2. Apply voltage higher than the highest set value of UDTrip, U1Low and U2Low to the U1
three-phase inputs and to one phase of the U2 inputs according to figure 61.
The voltage differential START signal is set.
3. Decrease slowly the voltage in phase UL3 of the test set until the START signal resets.
4. Check U2 blocking level by comparing the voltage level at reset with the set undervoltage
blocking U2Low.
12.6.5.2 Check of voltage differential trip and alarm levels SEMOD175258-104 v3
Procedure
188
UL1 UL1
IED TEST SET

UL2 UL2 1
UL3 UL3
IED
UN UN
UL1
UL2 2
UL3
Figure 62: Connection of the test set to the IED for test of alarm levels, trip levels
and trip timer
where:
2. Apply 1.2 · Ur (rated voltage) to the U1 and U2 inputs.

3. Decrease slowly the voltage of in phase UL1 of the test set until the ALARM signal is
activated.
The ALARM signal is delayed with timer tAlarm
4. Check the alarm operation level by comparing the differential voltage level at ALARM with
the set alarm level UDAlarm.
5. Continue to slowly decrease the voltage until START signal is activated.
6. Check the differential voltage operation level by comparing the differential voltage level
at START with the set trip level UDTrip.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to check the other phases.
Observe that the connections to U1 must be shifted to test another phase. (UL1 to UL2,
UL2 to UL3, UL3 to UL1)
12.6.5.3 Check of trip and trip reset timers SEMOD175258-124 v2
Procdure
2. Set Ur (rated voltage) to the U1 inputs and increase U2 voltage until differential voltage is
1.5 · operating level (UDTrip).
3. Switch on the test set. Measure the time from activation of the START signal until TRIP
signal is activated.
189
4. Check the measured time by comparing it to the set trip time tTrip.
5. Increase the voltage until START signal resets. Measure the time from reset of START
signal to reset of TRIP signal.
6. Check the measured time by comparing it to the set trip reset time tReset.
12.6.5.4 Final adjustment of compensation for VT ratio differences SEMOD175258-183 v2
Procedure
1. With the protection in test mode, view the differential voltage service values in each
phase on the local HMI under Main menu/Test/Function status/Voltage protection/
VoltageDiff(PTOV,60)/VDCPTOV:x.
The IED voltage inputs should be connected to the VTs according to valid
connection diagram.
2. Record the differential voltages.

3. Calculate the compensation factor RFLx for each phase.
For information about calculation of the compensation factor, see the application
manual.
4. Set the compensation factors on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/Settings
group N/Voltage protection/VoltageDiff(PTOV,60)/VDCPTOV:x
5. Check that the differential voltages are close to zero.
purposes.
12.6.6 100% Stator earth fault protection, 3rd harmonic based

STEFPHIZ SEMOD158990-3 v4
12.6.6.1
Testing
SEMOD158990-8 v3
The protection function uses measurement of the third-harmonic voltages in the neutral point
of the generator and on the generator terminal (broken delta voltage transformer connection
to the IED).
The test set shall be capable to generate third-harmonic voltages. One voltage (UN3) is
connected to the residual voltage input related to the terminal side of the generator. The
second voltage (UN3) is connected to the voltage input related to the neutral of the generator.
The angle between the injected third-harmonic voltages shall be adjustable.
190
U3T
U3N
en07000127.vsd
Figure 63: Typical phasor diagram for third harmonic voltages for healthy machine
1. Inject the following voltages: U3T = 15 V, U3N = 5 V and the angle between the voltages =
180°. Check the monitored values of the following analogue signals: E3 (the magnitude of
the third-harmonic induced voltage in the stator), U3N: 5 V (the magnitude of the third-
harmonic voltage measured at the neutral side of the generator), U3T: 15 V (the
magnitude of the third-harmonic voltage measured at the terminal side of the generator)
and ANGLE: 180° (the angle between the third-harmonic voltage phasors U3N and U3T).
The value of E3 should be close to the following value:
( U 3 N - U 3T × cos(ANGLE) ) + ( U 3T × sin(ANGLE) )
2 2
E3 =
2. Read the value of DU (differential voltage). The value of DU should be close to the
following value:
( U 3 N + U 3T × cos(ANGLE) ) + ( U 3T × sin(ANGLE) )
2 2
DU =
3. Decrease the value of the injected voltage U3N until the signal START3H is activated.
Check that
DU
= Beta
U 3N
considering stated accuracy (beta is a setting parameter)

4. Increase the voltage U3N so that the sart signal falls. After that, switch the voltage U3N to
zero and measure the time delay for the activation of the signals TRIP and TRIP3H.
The 100% stator earth fault protection also has a fundamental frequency neutral point
overvoltage function (95% stator earth fault protection). This part of the protection can
be tested separately by means of fundamental frequency voltage injection from a test
equipment.
12.6.6.2 Verifying settings SEMOD158990-144 v3
1. With the generator rotating at rated speed but not connected: check the value of the
following analogue signals: E3 (the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic induced voltage in the
stator), U3N (the magnitude of the third-harmonic voltage measured at the neutral side of
the generator), U3T (the magnitude of the third-harmonic voltage measured at the
191
terminal side of the generator) and ANGLE (the angle between the third-harmonic
voltage phasors U3N and U3T). The value of E3 should be close to the following value:
( U 3 N - U 3T × cos(ANGLE) ) + ( U 3T × sin(ANGLE) )
2 2
E3 =
Make sure that ANGLE has a value bigger than 125°

2. Read the value of DU (differential voltage). The value of DU should be close to the
following value:
DU = ( U 3 N + U 3T × cos(ANGLE) )2 + ( U 3T × sin(ANGLE) ) 2
3. Read the value of BU (bias voltage: Beta ·U3N). The ratio DU/BU should be well below 1 for
a non-faulted generator.
4. After synchronization of the generator the ratio DU/BU is checked for different load
levels of the generator. These different monitoring of load levels should be the base for
the setting of beta.
If the function is used with the option of neutral point measurement only the test is
performed by check of this voltage. The operate value should be above the measured
residual third-harmonic voltage in the neutral point at normal operation (non-faulted
generator).
purposes.
12.6.7 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD175023-3 v5
12.6.7.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values SEMOD175023-7 v7
1. Check that the input logical signals BLOCK, CBOPEN and VTSU are logical zero.
2. Supply a three-phase rated voltage in all three phases and note on the local HMI that the
TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.
3. Switch off the voltage in all three phases.
After set tTrip time a TRIP signal appears on the corresponding binary output or on the
local HMI.
Note that TRIP at this time is a pulse signal, duration should be according
to set tPulse.
4. Inject the measured voltages at rated values for at least set tRestore time.
5. Activate the CBOPEN binary input.
6. Simultaneously disconnect all the three-phase voltages from the IED.
8. Activate the VTSU binary input.
192

10. Reset the VTSU binary input.
14. Reset the BLOCK binary input.
purposes.
12.7 Frequency protection SEMOD53547-1 v1
12.7.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF M16289-2 v6
Verification of START value and time delay to operate M16289-17 v6
1. Check that the IED settings are appropriate, for example the START value and the time
delay.
3. Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage, until the START signal appears.
5. Increase the frequency until rated operating levels are reached.
7. Instantaneously decrease the frequency of the applied voltage to a value about 1% lower
than the operate value (a step change more than 2% will increase the time delay).
8. Measure the time delay of the TRIP signal, and compare it with the set value. Note that
the measured time consists of the set value for time delay plus minimum operate time of
the start function (80 - 90 ms).
1. The test above can be repeated to check the time to reset.

2. The tests above can be repeated to test the frequency dependent inverse time
characteristic.
Verification of the low voltage magnitude blocking M16289-39 v7
1. Check that the IED settings are appropriate, for example the StartFrequency, UMin , and
the tDelay.
2. Supply the IED with three-phase voltages at rated values.
3. Slowly decrease the magnitude of the applied voltage, until the BLKDMAGN signal
appears.
4. Note the voltage magnitude value and compare it with the set value UMin.
193
5. Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage, to a value below StartFrequency.
6. Check that the START signal does not appear.
7. Wait for a time corresponding to tDelay, make sure that the TRIP signal does not appear.
purposes.
12.7.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF M16290-2 v6
1. Check that the settings in the IED are appropriate, for example the START value and the
time delay.
3. Slowly increase the frequency of the applied voltage, until the START signal appears.
5. Decrease the frequency to rated operating conditions.
7. Instantaneously increase the frequency of the applied voltage to a value about 1% lower
than the operate value (a step change more than 2% will increase the time delay).
8. Measure the time delay for the TRIP signal, and compare it with the set value. Note that
the measured time consists of the set value for time delay plus minimum operate time of
the start function (80 - 90 ms).
1. The test above can be repeated to check the time to reset.
Verification of the low voltage magnitude blocking M16290-34 v5
1. Check that the settings in the IED are appropriate, for example the StartFrequency, UMin,
and the tDelay.
3. Slowly decrease the magnitude of the applied voltage, until the BLKDMAGN signal
appears.
4. Note the voltage magnitude value and compare it with the set value, UMin.
5. Slowly increase the frequency of the applied voltage, to a value above StartFrequency.
6. Check that the START signal does not appear.
7. Wait for a time corresponding to tDelay, make sure that the TRIP signal does not appear.
purposes.
194
12.7.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC M16256-2 v6
1. Check that the settings in the IED are appropriate, especially the START value and the
definite time delay. Set StartFreqGrad, to a rather small negative value.
3. Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage, with an increasing rate-of-change
that finally exceeds the setting of StartFreqGrad, and check that the START signal
appears.
5. Increase the frequency to rated operating conditions, and zero rate-of-change.
7. Instantaneously decrease the frequency of the applied voltage to a value about 20%
lower than the nominal value.
8. Measure the time delay for the TRIP signal, and compare it with the set value.
1. The test above can be repeated to check a positive setting of StartFreqGrad.

2. The tests above can be repeated to check the time to reset.
3. The tests above can be repeated to test the RESTORE signal, when the frequency
recovers from a low value.
purposes.
12.7.4 Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR GUID-F7BD8E10-EF88-4698-87F4-0D4365004705 v2
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section “Overview” and section
“Preparing for test” in this chapter.
12.7.4.1 Verifying the settings GUID-864636E0-6399-44E1-BD2C-C2113FB78C61 v3
Time measurement and the injection of current and voltage can be done using a common test
equipment.
Verification of the START value and time delay to operation

1. Connect the test set for the injection of three-phase currents and three-phase voltages to
the appropriate current and voltage terminals of the IED.
2. Ensure that the settings in the IED are appropriate, especially the CurrStartLevel,
FreqHighLimit, FreqLowLimit, UHighLimit and ULowLimit setting.
3. Supply the IED with three-phase currents and voltages at their rated value.
4. Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage until it crosses the frequency high
limit and the START signal appears.
5. Check that the FREQOK signal appears.
195
6. Compare the operate value to the set frequency high limit value.
7. Decrease the frequency of the applied voltage until it crosses the frequency low limit and
the START signal disappears.
8. Check that the FREQOK signal disappears.
9. Compare the reset value to the set frequency low limit value.
10. Readjust the frequency of the applied voltage (with steps of 0.001 Hz/s) to a value within
the set frequency band limit.
11. Ensure that the START signal reappears.
12. Wait for a time corresponding to tCont and ensure that the TRIP and TRIPCONT signals
are generated.
13. Measure the time delay for the TRIP signal and compare it to the set value.
Verification of the ACCALARM value and time delay to operation

1. Connect the test set for the injection of three-phase currents and three-phase voltages to
2. Ensure that the settings in the IED are appropriate for the default settings, especially the
CurrStartLevel, FreqHighLimit, FreqLowLimit, UHighLimit and ULowLimit setting.
3. Supply the IED with three-phase currents and voltages at their rated value.
4. Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage until it crosses the frequency high
limit and the START signal appears.
5. Continuously change the frequency of the applied voltage, so that for a certain time the
frequency is outside the set band limit and falls gradually within the band limit.
6. Count only the time when the frequency lies within the set frequency band limit. Wait for a
time corresponding to tAccLimit and ensure that the ACCALARM signal appears.
7. Measure the time delay for the ACCALARM signal and compare it to the set value.
Extended testing
1. To check the value of TRIPACC, repeat the above test case in such a way that the
frequency of the applied voltage is within the set frequency band when time approaches
the tAccLimit setting value.
Verification of generator start and stop logic

1. Ensure that the settings in the IED are appropriate to the default settings, especially the
CurrStartLevel, FreqHighLimit, FreqLowLimit, UHighLimit and ULowLimit.
2. Ensure that the setting CBCheck is enabled.
3. Supply the IED with three-phase currents and voltages at their rated values.
4. Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage until the START signal appears.
5. Activate the CBOPEN input signal.
6. Slowly decrease the injected current below the CurrStartLevel value until the START signal
disappears.
7. Compare the current magnitude value to the set value.
Verification of voltage band limit check logic

1. Ensure that the settings in the IED are appropriate to the default settings, especially the
CurrStartLevel, FreqHighLimit, FreqLowLimit, UHighLimit and ULowLimit settings.
2. Ensure that the EnaVoltCheck is enabled.
3. Supply the IED with three-phase currents and voltages at their rated values.
4. Check that the VOLTOK signal appears.
5. Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage until the START signal appears.
6. Slowly decrease the positive-sequence voltage of the injected voltage below the
ULowLimit value until the START signal disappears.
7. Check that the VOLTOK signal disappears.
8. Compare the reset value to the set voltage low limit value.
9. Readjust the positive-sequence voltage of the applied voltage to a value within the set
voltage band limits.
196
10. Check that the START signal reappears.

11. Slowly increase the positive-sequence voltage of the injected voltage above the
UHighLimit value until the START signal disappears.
12. Compare the reset value to the set voltage high limit value.
12.7.4.2 Completing the test GUID-83C3F041-9553-4804-9A39-B3E46A5C9AE6 v2
• Continue to test another function or end the test by changing the Test mode setting to
off.
• Restore connections and settings to their original values if they were changed for testing
purposes.
12.8 Multipurpose protection SEMOD53552-1 v1
12.8.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC SEMOD56488-3 v3
One of the new facilities within the general current and voltage protection function CVGAPC is
that the value, which is processed and used for evaluation in the function, can be chosen in
many different ways by the setting parameters CurrentInput and VoltageInput.
These setting parameters decide what kind of preprocessing the connected three-phase CT
and VT inputs shall be subjected to. That is, for example, single-phase quantities, phase-to-
phase quantities, positive sequence quantities, negative sequence quantities, maximum
quantity from the three-phase group, minimum quantity from the three-phase group,
difference between maximum and minimum quantities (unbalance) can be derived and then
used in the function.
Due to the versatile possibilities of CVGAPC itself, but also the possibilities of logic
combinations in the application configuration of outputs from more than one CVGAPC
function block, it is hardly possible to define a fully covering general commissioning test.
12.8.1.1 Built-in overcurrent feature (non-directional) SEMOD56488-9 v5
Procedure
1. Go to Main menu/Test/Function test modes/Multipurpose protection/

GeneralCurrentVoltage(GAPC)/CVGAPC:x and make sure that CVGAPC to be tested is
unblocked and other functions that might disturb the evaluation of the test are blocked.
2. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase currents to the appropriate current
3. Inject current(s) in a way that relevant measured current (according to setting parameter
CurrentInput) is created from the test set. Increase the current(s) until the low set stage
operates and check against the set operate value.
4. Decrease the current slowly and check the reset value.
5. Block high set stage if the injection current will activate the high set stage when testing
the low set stage according to below.
6. Connect a TRIP output contact to the timer.
7. Set the current to 200% of the operate value of low set stage, switch on the current and
check the time delay.
current at tMin.
197
8. Check that TRIP and START contacts operate according to the configuration logic.
9. Release the blocking of the high set stage and check the operate and reset value and the
time delay for the high set stage in the same way as for the low set stage.
10. Finally check that START and TRIP information is stored in the event menu.
Information on how to use the event menu is found in the operator's

manual.
12.8.1.2 Overcurrent feature with current restraint SEMOD56488-35 v3
The current restraining value has also to be measured or calculated and the influence on the
operation has to be calculated when the testing of the operate value is done.
Procedure
1. Operate value measurement

The current restraining value has also to be measured or calculated and the influence on
the operation has to be calculated when the testing of the operate value is done.
12.8.1.3 Overcurrent feature with voltage restraint SEMOD56488-44 v5
Procedure
1. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase currents and three-phase voltages to
2. Inject current(s) and voltage(s) in a way that relevant measured (according to setting
parameter CurrentInput and VoltageInput) currents and voltages are created from the
test set.
Overall check in principal as above (non-directional overcurrent feature)
3. Operate value measurement
The relevant voltage restraining value (according to setting parameter VoltageInput) has
also to be injected from the test set and the influence on the operate value has to be
calculated when testing of the operate value is done.
4. Operate time measurement
Definite times may be tested as above (non-directional overcurrent feature). For inverse
time characteristics the START value (to which the overcurrent ratio has to be calculated)
is the actual pickup value as got with actual restraining from the voltage restraining
quantity.
12.8.1.4 Overcurrent feature with directionality SEMOD56488-60 v5
Please note that the directional characteristic can be set in two different ways either just
dependent on the angle between current and polarizing voltage (setting parameter
DirPrinc_OC1 or DirPrinc_OC2 set to or in a way that the operate value also is dependent on the
angle between current and polarizing voltage according to the I · cos(F) law (setting
parameter DirPrinc_OC1 or DirPrinc_OC2 set to I · cos(F). This has to be known if a more
detailed measurement of the directional characteristic is made, than the one described below.
Procedure
198
1. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase currents and three-phase voltages to
2. Inject current(s) and voltage(s) in a way that relevant measured (according to setting
parameter CurrentInput and VoltageInput) currents and voltages are created from the
test set.
3. Set the relevant measuring quantity current to lag or lead (lag for negative RCA angle and
lead for positive RCA angle) the relevant polarizing quantity voltage by an angle equal to
the set IED characteristic angle (rca-dir) when forward directional feature is selected and
the CTstarpoint configuration parameter is set to ToObject.
If reverse directional feature is selected or CTstarpoint configuration parameter is set to
FromObject, the angle between current and polarizing voltage shall be set equal to rca-
dir+180°.
4. Overall check in principal as above (non-directional overcurrent feature)
5. Reverse the direction of the injection current and check that the protection does not
operate.
6. Check with low polarization voltage that the feature becomes non-directional, blocked or
with memory according to the setting.
12.8.1.5 Over/Undervoltage feature SEMOD56488-83 v2
Procedure
1. Connect the test set for injection three-phase voltages to the appropriate voltage
2. Inject voltage(s) in a way that relevant measured (according to setting parameter
VoltageInput) voltages are created from the test set.
3. Overall check in principal as above (non-directional overcurrent feature) and
correspondingly for the undervoltage feature.
purposes.
12.9 Secondary system supervision SEMOD53556-1 v1
12.9.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC M12917-25 v7
The Current circuit supervision function CCSSPVC is conveniently tested with the same three-
phase test set as used when testing the measuring functions in the IED.
The condition for this procedure is that the setting of IMinOp is lower than the setting of
Ip>Block.
199
1. Check the input circuits and the operate value of the IMinOp current level detector by
injecting current, one phase at a time.
2. Check the phase current blocking function for all three phases by injecting current, one
phase at a time. The output signals shall reset with a delay of 1 second when the current
exceeds 1.5 · IBase.
3. Inject a current 0.1 · IBase to the reference current input I5.
4. Increase slowly the current in one of the phases current input and check that FAIL output
is obtained when the current is about 0.9 · IBase.
purposes.
12.9.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC M1405-2 v8
The verification is divided in two main parts. The first part is common to all fuse failure
supervision options, and checks that binary inputs and outputs operate as expected according
to actual configuration. In the second part the relevant set operate values are measured.
12.9.2.1 Checking that the binary inputs and outputs operate as expected M1405-9 v8
1. Simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase currents in phase with their
corresponding phase voltages and with all of them equal to their rated values.
2. Connect the nominal dc voltage to the DISCPOS binary input.
• The signal BLKU should appear with almost no time delay.
• The signals BLKZ and 3PH should not appear on the IED.
• Only the distance protection function can operate.
• Undervoltage-dependent functions must not operate.
3. Disconnect the dc voltage from the DISCPOS binary input terminal.
4. Connect the nominal dc voltage to the MCBOP binary input.
• The BLKUand BLKZ signals should appear without any time delay.
• All undervoltage-dependent functions must be blocked.
5. Disconnect the dc voltage from the MCBOP binary input terminal.
6. Disconnect one of the phase voltages and observe the logical output signals on the
binary outputs of the IED.
BLKU and BLKZ signals should appear simultaneously wether the BLKU and BLKZ reset
depends on the setting SealIn “on” or “off”. If “on” no reset, if “off” reset.
7. After more than 5 seconds disconnect the remaining two-phase voltages and all three
currents.
• There should be no change in the high status of the output signals BLKU and BLKZ.
• The signal 3PH will appear.
8. Establish normal voltage and current operating conditions simultaneously and observe
the corresponding output signals.
They should change to logical 0 as follows:
• Signal 3PH after about 25ms
• Signal BLKU after about 50ms
• Signal BLKZ after about 200ms
200
12.9.2.2 Measuring the operate value for the negative sequence function M1405-46 v11
Measure the operate value for the negative sequence function, if included in the IED.
2. Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the BLKU signal appears.
3. Record the measured voltage and calculate the corresponding negative-sequence voltage
according to the equation (observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors):
3 ⋅ U 2 = U L1 + a 2 ⋅ U L2 + a ⋅ U L3
Where:
are the measured phase voltages
UL1 , U L2 and U L3
2 ×p
j 3
a = 1× e 3
= -0,. 5 + j
2
4. Compare the result with the set value of the negative-sequence operating voltage
(consider that the set value 3U2> is in percentage of the base voltage UBase).
5. Repeat steps 1 and 2. Then slowly increase the measured current in one phase until the
BLKU signal disappears.
6. Record the measured current and calculate the corresponding negative-sequence current
according to the equation (observe that the currents in the equation are phasors):
3 × I 2 = I L1 + a × I L 2 + a × I L 3
2
Where:
are the measured phase currents
I L1 , I L 2 and I L 3
2 ×p
j 3
a = 1× e 3
= -0,. 5 + j
2
7. Compare the result with the set value of the negative-sequence operating current.
Consider that the set value 3I2< is in percentage of the base current IBase.
12.9.2.3 Measuring the operate value for the zero-sequence function M1405-72 v10
Measure the operate value for the zero-sequence function, if included in the IED.
2. Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the BLKU signal appears.
3. Record the measured voltage and calculate the corresponding zero-sequence voltage
according to the equation (observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors):
201
3 × U0 = U L1 + UL2 + U L3
IEC00000276 V1 EN-US (Equation 111)
Where:
UL1 , U L 2 and U L3
are the measured phase voltages
4. Compare the result with the set value of the zero-sequence operating voltage (consider
that the set value 3U0> is in percentage of the base voltage.)
5. Repeat steps 1 and 2. Then slowly increase the measured current in one phase until the
BLKU signal disappears.
6. Record the measured current and calculate the corresponding zero-sequence current
according to the equation (observe that the currents in the equation are phasors):
3 × I 0 = I L1 + I L2 + I L3
Where:
are the measured phase currents
I L1 , I L 2 and I L 3
7. Compare the result with the set value of the zero-sequence operate current. Consider
that the set value 3I0< is in percentage of the base current IBase.
12.9.2.4 Measuring the operate value for the dead line detection function GUID-4ABF1FD4-F6D3-4109-AFE5-552875E558A0 v4
1. Apply three-phase voltages with their rated value and zero currents.
2. Decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the DLD1PH signal appears.
3. This is the point at which the dead line condition is detected. Check the value of the
decreased voltage with the set value UDLD< (UDLD< is in percentage of the base voltage
UBase).
4. Apply three-phase currents with their rated value and zero voltages.
5. Decrease the measured current in one phase until the DLD1PH signal appears.
6. This is the point at which the dead line condition is detected. Check the value of the
decreased current with the set value IDLD< (IDLD< is in percentage of the base current
IBase).
12.9.2.5 Checking the operation of the du/dt and di/dt based function M1405-96 v11
Check the operation of the du/dt and di/dt based function if included in the IED.
2. Change the voltages and currents in all three phases simultaneously.
The voltage change must be higher than the set value DU> and the current change must
be lower than the set value DI<.
• The BLKU and BLKZ signals appear without any time delay. The BLKZ signal will be
activated only if the internal deadline detection is not activated at the same time.
• 3PH should appear after 5 seconds, if the remaining voltage levels are lower than
the set UDLD< of the dead line detection function.
3. Apply normal conditions as in step 1.
202
The BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH signals should reset, if activated, see step 1 and 2.
4. Change the voltages and currents in all three phases simultaneously.
The voltage change must be higher than the set value DU> and the current change must
be higher than the set value DI<.
The BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH signals should not appear.
5. Repeat step 2.
6. Connect the nominal voltages in all three phases and feed a current below the operate
level in all three phases.
7. Keep the current constant. Disconnect the voltage in all three phases simultaneously.
The BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH signals should not appear.
8. Change the magnitude of the voltage and current for phase 1 to a value higher than the
set value DU> and DI<.
9. Check that the start output signals STDUL1 and STDIL1 and the general start signals
STDU or STDI are activated.
10. Check that the start output signals for the current and voltage phases 2 and 3 are
activated by changing the magnitude of the voltage and current for phases 2 and 3.
purposes.
12.9.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC GUID-DCCD4C4A-8335-43BA-A2B2-9994380985B0 v2
GUID-004BFFE4-B1C1-4C0E-8D7A-ABE7B566AB28 v2
Checking the operation of binary input and output

1. Simulate normal operation conditions with three-phase voltage on the main fuse group
and the pilot fuse group. Ensure the values are equal to their rated values.
2. Disconnect one of the phase voltage from the main fuse group or the pilot fuse group.
Observe the binary outputs of the IED. The MAINFUF or the PILOTFUF signals are
simultaneously activated. Only the output circuit related to the open phase will be active
i.e either MAINFUF or PILOTFUF.
3. Establish a normal voltage operating condition and observe the corresponding output
signals. MAINFUF or PILOTFUF should change to 0 in about 27 ms.
4. Set normal conditions as mentioned in step 1.
5. Enable the BLOCK binary input and repeat step 2. MAINFUF or PILOTFUF should not
appear.
Checking the operation of MAINFUF and PILOTFUF

1. Simulate normal operation conditions with three-phase voltage on the main fuse group
and the pilot fuse group. Ensure the values are equal to their rated values.
2. Decrease one of the three-phase voltages on main fuse group or pilot fuse group. The
voltage change must be greater than the set value for Ud>MainBlock or Ud>PilotAlarm.
MAINFUF or PILOTFUF signals are activated without any time delay.
3. Set normal conditions as mentioned in step 1. MAINFUF or PILOTFUF signals should reset.
4. Set SealIn to On, UD>MainBlock to 20% of UBase and USealIn to 70% of UBase.
5. Apply three-phase voltages with the value slightly below USealIn level.
6. Decrease one of the three-phase voltages on main fuse group. The voltage change must
be greater than the set value for Ud>MainBlock. MAINFUF signal is activated.
203
7. After more than 5 seconds increase the measured voltage back to the value slightly below
USealIn level. MAINFUF signal should not reset.
8. Slowly increase measured voltage to the value slightly above USealIn until MAINFUF signal
resets.
9. Record the measured voltage and compare with the set value USealIn.
12.9.3.1 Completing the test GUID-38A57549-E6BF-46CB-ADFB-79305684EB67 v1
purposes.
12.10 Control SEMOD53560-1 v1
12.10.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN M2377-3 v11
This section contains instructions on how to test the synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing function SESRSYN for single, double and 1½ breaker arrangements.
At commissioning and periodical checks, the functions shall be tested with the used settings.
To test a specific function, it might be necessary to change some setting parameters, for
example:
• AutoEnerg = Off/DLLB/DBLL/Both
• ManEnerg = Off
• Operation = Off/On
• Activation of the voltage selection function if applicable
The tests explained in the test procedures below describe the settings, which can be used as
references during testing before the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the
equipment to the normal or desired settings.
A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angle and amplitude of
the voltage is needed. The test set must also be able to generate different frequencies on
different outputs.
The description below applies for a system with a nominal frequency of 50 Hz

but can be directly applicable to 60 Hz. SESRSYN can be set to use different
phases, phase to earth or phase to phase. Use the set voltages instead of what
is indicated below.
Figure 64 shows the general test connection principle, which can be used during testing. This
description describes the test of the version intended for one bay.
Figure 65 shows the general test connection for a 1½ breaker diameter with one-phase voltage
connected to the line side.
204
IED
Test UMeasure
U-Bus
equipment U3PBB1 Ph/N
N Ph/Ph
Input Phase
L1,L2,L3
L12,L23,L31
UMeasure
U-Line
U3PLN1 Ph/N
Ph/Ph
UL1
UL2
Input Phase
UL3
L1,L2,L3
N
N L12,L23,L31
Figure 64: General test connection with three-phase voltage connected to the line side
IED
Test U-Bus1
equipment U3PBB1 UMeasure
Ph/N
N Ph/Ph
U-Bus2
U3PBB2
Input Phase
N L1,L2,L3
U-Line2
U3PLN2 L12,L23,L31
N
UMeasure
Ph/N
U-Line1 Ph/Ph
U3PLN1
Input Phase
L1,L2,L3
L12,L23,L31
N N
Figure 65: General test connection for a 1½ breaker diameter with one-phase voltage
connected to the line side
12.10.1.1 Testing the synchronizing function M2377-21 v8
The voltage inputs used are:
UP3LN1 UL1, UL2 or UL3 line 1 voltage inputs on the IED

UP3BB1 Bus1 voltage input on the IED
205
Testing the frequency difference M2377-116 v10

The frequency difference test should verify that operation is achieved when the frequency
difference between bus and line is less than set value of FreqDiffMaxand above set value of
FreqDiffMin. The test procedure below will depend on the settings used. Input STARTSYN
must be activated during the test.
FreqDiffMax = 50.2 Hz
FreqDiffMin = 50.01 Hz
tBreaker = 0.080 s
1. Apply voltages
1.1. U-Line = 100% UBaseLine and f-Line = 50.0 Hz
1.2. U-Bus = 100% UBaseBus and f-Bus = 50.15Hz
2. Check that a closing pulse is submitted at a closing angle equal to calculated phase angle
value from the formula below. Modern test sets will evaluate this automatically.
Closing Angle = |( (fBus– fLine) * tBreaker * 360 degrees) |
fBus= Bus frequency
fLine= Line frequency
tBreaker = Set closing time of the breaker
3. Repeat with
3.1. U-Bus = 100% UBaseBus and f-bus = 50.25 Hz, to verify that the function does not
operate when frequency difference is above limit.
4. Verify that the closing command is not issued when the frequency difference is less than
the set value FreqDiffMin.
12.10.1.2 Testing the synchrocheck check M2377-132 v8
During the test of SESRSYN for a single bay arrangement, these voltage inputs are used:
U-Line UL1, UL2 or UL3 line 1 voltage input on the IED according to the connection in
SMT
U-Bus Bus voltage input on the IED according to the connection in SMT
Testing the voltage difference M2377-194 v8

Set the voltage difference to 0.15 p.u. on the local HMI, and the test should check that
operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiffSC is lower than 0.15 p.u.
The settings used in the test shall be final settings. The test shall be adapted to site setting
values instead of values in the example below.
Test with no voltage difference between the inputs.
Test with a voltage difference higher than the set UDiffSC.
1. Apply voltages U-Line (for example) = 80% GblBaseSelLine and U-Bus = 80%
GblBaseSelBusGblBaseSelBus with the same phase-angle and frequency.
2. Check that the AUTOSYOK and MANSYOK outputs are activated.
3. The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify that the function
operates within the set UDiffSC. Check with both U-Line and U-Bus respectively lower
than the other.
4. Increase the U-Bus to 110% GblBaseSelBus, and the U-Line = 90% GblBaseSelLine and
also the opposite condition.
5. Check that the two outputs for manual and auto synchronism are not activated.
206
Testing the phase angle difference M2377-215 v8

The phase angle differences PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA respectively are set to their final
settings and the test should verify that operation is achieved when the phase angle difference
is lower than this value both leading and lagging.
Test with no voltage difference.
1. Apply voltages U-Line (for example) = 100% GblBaseSelLine and U-Bus = 100%
GblBaseSelBus, with a phase difference equal to 0 degrees and a frequency difference
lower than FreqDiffA and FreqDiffM.
The test can be repeated with other phase difference values to verify that the function
operates for values lower than the set ones, PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA. By changing the
phase angle on the voltage connected to U-Bus, between ± dφ degrees, the user can
check that the two outputs are activated for a phase difference lower than the set value.
It should not operate for other values. See figure 66.
U-Bus
No operation
+dj
U-Line operation
-dj
U-Bus
en05000551.vsd
Figure 66: Test of phase difference

3. Change the phase angle between +dφ and -dφ and verify that the two outputs are
activated for phase differences between these values but not for phase differences
outside, see figure 66.
Testing the frequency difference M2377-232 v9

The frequency difference test should verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiffA and
FreqDiffM frequency difference is lower than the set value for manual and auto synchronizing
check, FreqDiffA and FreqDiffM respectively and that operation is blocked when the frequency
difference is greater.
Test with frequency difference = 0 mHz
Test with a frequency difference outside the set limits for manual and auto synchronizing
check respectively.
1. Apply voltages U-Line equal to 100% GblBaseSelLine and U-Bus equal to 100%
GblBaseSelBus, with a frequency difference equal to 0 mHz and a phase difference lower
than the set value.
3. Apply voltage to the U-Line equal to 100% GblBaseSelLine with a frequency equal to 50
Hz and voltage U-Bus equal to 100% GblBaseSelBus, with a frequency outside the set
limit.
4. Check that the two outputs are not activated. The test can be repeated with different
frequency values to verify that the function operates for values lower than the set ones. If
a modern test set is used, the frequency can be changed continuously.
207
Testing the reference voltage M2377-249 v5
1. Use the same basic test connection as in figure 64.

The voltage difference between the voltage connected to U-Bus and U-Line should be 0%,
so that the AUTOSYOK and MANSYOK outputs are activated first.
2. Change the U-Line voltage connection to U-Line2 without changing the setting on the
local HMI. Check that the two outputs are not activated.
12.10.1.3 Testing the energizing check M2377-262 v6
During the test of the energizing check function for a single bay arrangement, these voltage
inputs are used:
U-Line UL1, UL2 or UL3 line1 voltage inputs on the IED

U-Bus Bus voltage input on the IED
General M2377-271 v6
When testing the energizing check function for the applicable bus, arrangement shall be done
for the energizing check functions. The voltage is selected by activation of different inputs in
the voltage selection logic.
Live voltage level is fixed to 80% UBase and dead voltage level to fixed 40% UBase.
The test shall be performed according to the settings for the station. Test the alternatives
below that are applicable.
Testing the dead line live bus (DLLB) M2377-276 v7

The test should verify that the energizing check function operates for a low voltage on the U-
Line and for a high voltage on the U-Bus. This corresponds to the energizing of a dead line to a
live bus.
1. Apply a single-phase voltage 100% GblBaseSelBus to the U-Bus, and a single-phase

voltage 30% GblBaseSelLine to the U-Line.
2. Check that the AUTOENOK and MANENOK outputs are activated after set tAutoEnerg
respectively tManEnerg.
3. Increase the U-Line to 60% GblBaseSelLine and U-Bus to be equal to 100%
GblBaseSelBus. The outputs should not be activated.
4. The test can be repeated with different values on the U-Bus and the U-Line.
Testing the dead bus live line (DBLL) M2377-289 v8

The test should verify that the energizing check function operates for a low voltage on the U-
Bus and for a high voltage on the U-Line. This corresponds to an energizing of a dead bus to a
live line.
1. Verify the settings AutoEnerg or ManEnerg to be DBLL.

2. Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% GblBaseSelBus to the U-Bus and a single-phase
voltage of 100% GblBaseSelLine to the U-Line.
4. Decrease the U-Line to 60% GblBaseSelLine and keep the U-Bus equal to 30%
GblBaseSelBus. The outputs should not be activated.
Testing both directions (DLLB or DBLL) M2377-306 v7
208
1. Verify the local HMI settings AutoEnerg or ManEnerg to be Both.

2. Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% GblBaseSelLine to the U-Line and a single-phase
voltage of 100% GblBaseSelBus to the U-Bus.
4. Change the connection so that the U-Line is equal to100% GblBaseSelLine and the U-Bus
is equal to 30% GblBaseSelBus. The outputs should still be activated.
Testing the dead bus dead line (DBDL) M2377-323 v8

The test should verify that the energizing check function operates for a low voltage on both
the U-Bus and the U-Line, that is, closing of the breaker in a non-energized system. Test is valid
only when this function is used.
1. Verify the local HMI setting AutoEnerg to be Off and ManEnerg to be DBLL.
2. Set the parameter ManEnergDBDL to On.
3. Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% GblBaseSelBus to the U-Bus and a single-phase
voltage of 30% GblBaseSelLine to the U-Line.
4. Check that the MANENOK output is activated after set tManEnerg.
5. Increase the U-Bus to 80% GblBaseSelBus and keep the U-Line equal to 30%
GblBaseSelLine. The outputs should not be activated.
6. Repeat the test with ManEnerg set to DLLB with different values on the U-Bus and the U-
Line voltage.
12.10.1.4 Testing the voltage selection M2377-342 v2
Testing the voltage selection for single CB arrangements M2377-473 v7

This test should verify that the correct voltage is selected for the measurement in the
SESRSYN function used in a double-bus arrangement. Apply a single-phase voltage of 100%
GblBaseSelLine to the U-Line and a single-phase voltage of 100% GblBaseSelBus to the U-Bus.
If the UB1/2OK inputs for the fuse failure are used, they must be activated, during tests below.
Also verify that deactivation prevents operation and gives an alarm.
1. Connect the signals above to binary inputs and binary outputs.

2. Connect the voltage inputs to the analog inputs used for each bus or line depending of
the type of busbar arrangement and verify that correct output signals are generated.
Testing the voltage selection for double breaker M2377-691 v6

This test should verify that correct voltage is selected for the measurement in the SESRSYN
function used for a diameter in a One-and-a-half breaker arrangement. Apply a single-phase
voltage of 100% GblBaseSelLine to the U-Line and a single-phase voltage of 100%
GblBaseSelBus to the U-Bus. Verify that correct output signals are generated.
1. Connect the analog signals to the voltage inputs, in pair of two for U1 and U2. (Inputs
U3PBB1, U3PBB2, U3PLN1, U3PLN2)
2. Activate the binary signals according to the used alternative. Verify the measuring
voltage on the synchronizing check function SESRSYN. Normally it can be good to verify
synchronizing check with the same voltages and phase angles on both voltages. The
voltages should be verified to be available when selected and not available when another
input is activated so connect only one voltage transformer reference at each time.
3. Record the voltage selection tests in a matrix table showing read values and AUTOSYOK/
MANSYOK signals to document the test performed.
209
Testing the voltage selection for 1 1/2 CB arrangements GUID-12E7DA63-FE04-4C83-9BA6-34818C510DB8 v4

At test of the SESRSYN function for a 1½ CB diameter the following alternative voltage inputs
can be used for the three SESRSYN (SESRSYN 1, SESRSYN 2, SESRSYN 3) functions. These three
SESRSYN functions can either be in one, two or three different IEDs. Table 33 describes the
scenario when SESRSYN 1, SESRSYN 2 and SESRSYN 3 all are in the same IED. If SESRSYN 3 is in
another IED, WA1 will be considered as WA2 and LINE2 as LINE1. The voltage is selected by
activation of different inputs in the voltage selection logic as shown in table 33 and figure 67.
Table 33: Voltage selection logic

SESRSYN CBConfig Section to Activated Activated Activated Activated Indication
setting be B1QCLD B2QCLD LN1QCLD LN2QCLD from
synchroniz input on input on input on input on SESRSYN
ed IED from IED from IED from IED from on IED
SESRSYN 1 1 ½ bus CB WA1 – LINE1_QB B1SEL,
(Operates on LINE1 9 LN1SEL
WA1_QA1)
WA1 – TIE_QA1 LINE2_QB B1SEL,
LINE2 9 LN2SEL
WA1 – TIE_QA1 WA2_QA1 B1SEL,
WA2 B2SEL
SESRSYN 2 Tie CB LINE1 – LINE1_QB LINE2_QB LN1SEL,
(Operates on LINE2 9 9 LN2SEL
TIE_QA1)
WA1 – WA1_QA1 LINE2_QB B1SEL,
LINE2 9 LN2SEL
WA2 – WA2_QA1 LINE1_QB B2SEL,
LINE1 9 LN1SEL
WA1 – WA1_QA1 WA2_QA1 B1SEL,
WA2 B2SEL
SESRSYN 3 1 ½ bus WA2 – LINE2_QB B2SEL,
(Operates on alt. CB LINE2 9 LN2SEL
WA2_QA1) (mirrored)
WA2 – TIE_QA1 LINE1_QB B2SEL,
LINE1 9 LN1SEL
WA2 – TIE_QA1 WA1_QA1 B1SEL,
WA1 B2SEL
210
WA1
WA2
WA1_QA1 WA2_QA1
(SESRSYN 1) (SESRSYN 3)
TIE_QA1
(SESRSYN 2)
LINE1_QB9 LINE2_QB9
LINE1 LINE2
Figure 67: Objects used in the voltage selection logic
purposes.
12.10.2 Apparatus control APC M13385-2 v4
The apparatus control function consists of four types of function blocks, which are connected
in a delivery-specific way between bays and to the station level. For that reason, test the total
function in a system, that is, either in a complete delivery system as an acceptance test (FAT/
SAT) or as parts of that system.
If a block/unblock command is sent from remote to function, while the IED is

shut down, this command will not be recognized after the start up, thus the
command that was sent prior to the shut down is used. In such cases, where
there is a mismatch, the user is advised to make a complete cycle of block/
unblock operations to align the statuses.
12.10.3 Tap changer control and supervision TCMYLTC, TCLYLTC SEMOD175185-3 v12
The automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC is based on a
transformer configuration that consists of one tap changer on a single two-winding power
transformer.
211
The automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC, if installed, may be
set to operate in Master Follower (MF) mode, or Minimise Circulating Current (MCC) mode. The
commissioning tests for each parallel control mode are addressed separately in the following
procedure.
Secondary injection of load current (IL) and secondary bus voltage (UB) equivalent quantities
are required during installation and commissioning tests. The test consists mainly of:
1. Increasing or decreasing the injected voltage or current at the analogue inputs of the IED.
2. Checking that the corresponding commands (Lower or Raise) are issued by the voltage
control function.
Setting confirmation is an important step for voltage control in the installation and
commissioning phase to ensure consistency of power systems base quantities, alarm/
blocking conditions and parallel control settings for each transformer control function.
Before starting any test, verify the following settings in PCM600 or the local HMI for TR1ATCC,
TR8ATCC and TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC.
• Confirm power system base quantities I1Base, I2Base, UBase.
Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/

TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/General
and

TR1ATCC:x
• Confirm that the setting for short circuit impedance Xr2 for TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC is in
accordance with transformer data:
• Short circuit impedance, available on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
settings/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/
Xr2.
• Confirm that the setting for TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC is in accordance with transformer data:
• Tap change timeout duration - effectively the maximum transformer tap change
time, tTCTimeout, available on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
Settings/Control/TransformerTapControl(YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/
tTCTimeout.
• Load tap changer pulse duration - required length of pulse from IED to load tap
changer, tPulseDur, available on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
Settings/Control/TransformerTapControl(YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/
tPulseDur.
• Transformer tap range, LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, available on the local HMI
under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/
TransformerTapControl(YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/HighVoltTap and .
• Load tap changer code type - method for digital feedback of tap position,
CodeType, available on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/ IED settings/
Control/TransformerTapControl(YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/CodeType.
212
During the installation and commissioning, the behavior of the voltage control
functions for different tests may be governed by a parameter group, available
on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x. These
parameter settings can cause a Total Block, Automatic Block or Alarm for a
variety of system conditions including over and under voltage, over current and
tap changer failure. It is important to review these settings and confirm the
intended response of the voltage control function for different secondary
injection tests.
Terminology
The busbar voltage UB is a shorter notation for the measured voltages UL1, UL2, UL3 or Uij,
where Uij is the phase-phase voltage, Uij = Ui -Uj, or Ui, where Ui is one single-phase-to-earth
voltage.
IL is a shorter notation for the measured load current; it is to be used instead of the three-
phase quantities IL1, IL2, IL3 or the two-phase quantities Ii and Ij, or single-phase current Ii.
Also note that for simplicity, the Parameter Setting menu structures included in
the following procedure are referred to universally as VCP1, for example, Main
menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/Time/t1 and
t2l.
For cases where single-mode voltage control is implemented, the Parameter Setting menu
structure includes TR1ATCC:1 instead of the parallel designator TR8ATCC:1.
12.10.3.1 Secondary test SEMOD175185-145 v5
The voltage control function performs basic voltage regulation by comparing a calculated load
voltage (UL) against a voltage range defined by setting UDeadband (with upper and lower
limits U2 and U1 respectively). The calculated load voltage UL represents the secondary
transformer bus voltage UB adjusted for Load drop compensation (LDC) where enabled in
settings.
Note that when LDC is disabled, UB equals UL.
When the load voltage UL stays within the interval between U1 and U2, no action will be taken.
If UL < U1 or UL > U2, a command timer will start, which is constant time or inverse time
defined by setting t1 and t1Use. The command timer will operate while the measured voltage
stays outside the inner deadband (defined by setting UDeadbandInner).
If UL remains outside of the voltage range defined by UDeadband and the command timer
expires, the voltage control will execute a raise or lower command to the transformer tap
changer. This command sequence will be repeated until UL is brought back within the inner
deadband range.
12.10.3.2 Check the activation of the voltage control operation SEMOD175185-537 v9
213
1. Confirm Transformer Tap Control = On and Transformer Voltage Control = On

• Direct tap change control
Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/TransformerTapChanger(YLTC,84)/

TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/Operation
• Automatic transformer voltage control

TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/General/Operation
• Enable Tap Command
Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/TransformerTapChanger(YLTC,84)/

TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/EnabTapCmd
While the test set is connected to the IED but no voltage is applied, the voltage control
functions will detect an undervoltage condition that may result in an alarm or blocking of
the voltage-control operation. These conditions will be shown on the local HMI.
2. Apply the corresponding voltage
Confirm the analog measuring mode prior to undertaking secondary injection (positive
sequence, phase-to-phase, or phase-to-earth). This measuring mode is defined in the
local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/General/MeasMode
The application of nominal voltage USet according to set MeasMode to the IEDs should
cause the alarm or blocking condition for undervoltage to reset.
12.10.3.3 Check the normal voltage regulation function SEMOD175185-562 v5
1. Review the settings for UDeadband (based on percentage of nominal bus voltage) and
calculate the upper (U2) and lower (U1) voltage regulation limits for which a tap change
command will be issued.
2. Review the expected time for first (t1) and subsequent (t2) tap change commands from
the voltage control function on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/Setting Group
N/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/Time/t1 and
t2l
3. Lower the voltage 1% below U1 and wait for the issue of a Raise command from the
voltage control after the expiry of a constant or inverse time delay set by t1. Detection of
this command will involve locating the allocated binary output for a raise pulse command
in the Signal Matrix in PCM600 and monitoring a positive from this output.
4. After the issue of the raise command, return the applied voltage to USet (nominal value).
5. Raise the voltage 1% above the upper deadband limit U2 and wait for the issue of a lower
command from the voltage control after the expiry of a constant or inverse time delay set
by t1. Detection of this command will involve locating the allocated binary output for a
low pulse command in the Signal Matrix in PCM600 and monitoring a positive from this
output.
6. Return the applied voltage to USet.
12.10.3.4 Check the undervoltage block function SEMOD175185-578 v6
1. Confirm the setting for Ublock, nominally at 80% of rated voltage.

2. Confirm the voltage control function response to an applied voltage below Ublock, by
reviewing the setting in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/UVBk that may cause an
214
alarm, total or automatic block of the voltage control function to be displayed on the
local HMI.
3. Apply a voltage slightly below Ublock and confirm the response of the voltage control
function.
12.10.3.5 Check the upper and lower busbar voltage limit SEMOD175185-588 v6
1. Confirm the settings for Umin and Umax in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
Settings/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/
Voltage/Umax or Umin and Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/TR8ATCC (90)/
TR8ATCC:n/Voltage/Umax
2. Confirm the voltage control function response to an applied voltage below Umin and
above Umax, by reviewing the settings in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
Settings/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/
UVPartBk and Main menu/IED Settings/Control/TransformerVoltageControl/
TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/OVPartBk. These conditions may cause an alarm or total block
of the voltage control function to be displayed on the local HMI.
3. Decrease the injected voltage slightly below the Umin value and check for the
corresponding blocking or alarm condition on the local HMI. For an alarm condition, the
voltage regulation function is not blocked and a raise command should be issued from
the IED.
4. Increase the applied voltage slightly above the Umax value and check for the
corresponding blocking or alarm condition on the local HMI. For an alarm condition, the
voltage regulation function is not blocked and a lower command should be issued from
the IED.
12.10.3.6 Check the overcurrent block function SEMOD175185-605 v6
1. Confirm the setting for Iblock in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/
Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,91)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/TCCtrl/Iblock
2. Confirm the voltage control function response to an applied current above Iblock, by
reviewing the settings in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/
Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,91)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/OVPartBk. This
condition may cause an alarm or total block of the voltage control function to be
displayed on the local HMI.
3. Inject a current higher than the Iblock setting and confirm the alarm or blocking
condition is present on the local HMI. If an automatic or total blocking condition occurs,
change the applied secondary voltage and confirm that no tap change commands are
issued from the associated binary outputs. This situation can also be confirmed through
reviewing the disturbance and service reports on the local HMI.
12.10.3.7 Single transformer SEMOD175185-669 v2
Load drop compensation SEMOD175185-672 v5
1. Confirm that OperationLDC is set to On.

2. Confirm settings for Rline and Xline.
3. Calculate the expected load voltage UL (displayed as a measured value on the local HMI)
based on secondary injection of transformer secondary voltage (UB = USet) and rated
load current (IL = I1Base), in accordance with equation 115.
215
where:
UL, IL = Re(IL) + jlm(IL) are complex phase quantities
When all secondary phase-to-earth voltages are available, use the positive-sequence
components of voltage and current. By separation of real and imaginary parts:
ul , re =ub , re - rline × il , re + xline × il , im

ul , im =ub , im - xline × il , re - rline × il , im

where:
ub is the complex value of the busbar voltage
il is the complex value of the line current (secondary side)
rline is the value of the line resistance
xline is the value of the line reactance
For comparison with the set-point value, the modulus of UL are according to
equation 118.
¦ UL¦ = (ul , re)2 + (ul , im)2

4. Inject voltage for UB equal to setting USet.

5. Inject current equal to rated current I2Base.
6. Confirm on the local HMI that service values for bus voltage and load current are equal to
injected quantities.
7. Confirm that the calculated value for load voltage, displayed on the local HMI, is equal to
that derived through hand calculations.
8. When setting OperationLDC set to On, the voltage regulation algorithm uses the
calculated value for load voltage as the regulating quantity to compare against USet and
the voltage deadband limits UDeadband and UDeadbandInner.
9. While injecting rated current I2Base into the IED, inject a quantity for UB that is slightly
higher then USet + |(Rline+jXLine) · IL|. This will ensure that the regulating voltage UL is
higher than USet, and hence no tap change command should be issued from the IED.
10. Reduce the injected voltage for UB slightly below USet + |(Rline+jXLine) · IL| and confirm
that the calculated value for load voltage is below USet and a tap change command is
issued from the IED.
12.10.3.8 Parallel voltage regulation SEMOD175185-714 v2
Master follower voltage regulation SEMOD175185-716 v6
216
1. For the transformers connected in the parallel group, confirm that OperationPAR is set to
MF.
2. For parallel operation, it is also recommended to confirm for parallel group membership,
defined by setting TnRXOP in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/Setting group N/
Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x/ParCtrl
The general parallel arrangement of transformers are defined by setting TnRXOP to On or
Off. The following rules are applicable on the settings T1RXOP – T4RXOP.
If IED T1 and T2 are connected,
• T1RXOP shall be set to On in instance 2 of TR8ATCC,
• T2RXOP shall be set to On in instance 3 of TR8ATCC,
• T2RXOP and T3RXOP shall be set to On in instance 1 of TR8ATCC, and so on.
The parameter corresponding to the own IED must not be set. T1RXOP
should thus not be set in IED T1, T2RXOP not in IED T2, and so on.
3. The lowest transformer number in the parallel group is by default set as the Master –
confirm that this is the case by reviewing the setting in the local HMI.
command will be issued from the master transformer in the group.
the master transformer in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/Setting group N/
Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/Time/t1 and t2
6. Apply a voltage 1% below U1 and wait for the issue of a raise command from the voltage
control after the expiry of a constant or inverse time delay set by t1. Detection of this
command will involve locating the allocated binary output for a raise command in the
Signal Matrix in PCM600 and monitoring a positive from this output. Confirm the timing
of this command correlates with the setting t1.
7. After the issue of the raise command, confirm that all follower transformers in the group
change tap in accordance with the command issued from the master transformer.
8. Inject a voltage UB for the master transformer that is 1% above the upper deadband limit
U2 and wait for the issue of a lower command from the voltage control after the expiry of
a constant or inverse time delay set by t2.
9. Confirm that all follower transformers in the group change tap in accordance with this
command.
Circulating current voltage regulation SEMOD175185-775 v6

This instruction for confirmation of circulating current voltage regulation assumes two
transformers in the parallel group. Setting confirmation through secondary injection requires
calculation of circulating currents for each transformer based on impedance values and
respective compensating factors, and is therefore more complex for greater than two
transformers.
1. Confirm that OperationPAR is set to CC for the transformers in the parallel group.
2. For parallel operation, it is also recommended that settings be confirmed for parallel
group membership, governed by setting TnRXOP in the local HMI under Main menu/
Settings/Setting group N/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x/
ParCtrl
The general parallel arrangement of transformers are defined by setting TnRXOP to On or
Off. The following rules are applicable on the settings T1RXOP - T4RXOP.
If IED T1 and T2 are connected,
• T1RXOP shall be set to On in instance 2 of TR8ATCC, and
• T2RXOP shall be set to On in instance 1 of TR8ATCC.
If T1 - T3 are available,
217
• T1RXOP and T2RXOP shall be set to On in instance 3 of TR8ATCC,

• T2RXOP and T3RXOP shall be set to On in instance 1 of TR8ATCC and so on.
The parameter corresponding to the own IED must not be set. T1RXOP
should thus not be set in IED T1, T2RXOPnot in IED T2 and so on.
command will be issued from the master transformer in the group.
the master transformer in the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/Setting group N/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x/Time/t1 and t2
5. Inject a voltage UB equal to USet for each transformer.
6. Inject a load current for Transformer 1 that is equal to rated load current I2Base and a
load current for Transformer 2 that is equal to 95% of rated load current I2Base. This will
have the effect of producing a calculated circulating current that flows from HV to LV
side for Transformer 1 and LV to HV side for Transformer 2.
7. Confirm that a circulating current is measured on the local HMI that is equal in magnitude
to 5% of I2Base, with polarity as discussed in step 6.
8. Confirm the settings for Ci (Compensation Factor) and Xi (Transformer Short Circuit
Impedance). Using these setting values and the measured quantity of circulating current
from the local HMI (Icc_i), calculate the value for circulating current voltage adjustment
Uci.
Udi = Ci × Icc _ i × Xi
The voltage regulation algorithm then increases (for transformer T2) or decreases (for
transformer T1) the measured voltage by Udi and compares Ui against the voltage
deadband limits U1 and U2 for the purposes of voltage regulation.
9. To cause a tap change, the calculated value for circulating current voltage adjustment
must offset the injected quantity for bus voltage UB so that Ui is outside the voltage
deadband created by setting UDeadband. Expressed by equation 121 and equation 122.
(for the purposes of this test procedure)
Therfore:
Ci × Icc _ i × Xi > U 2 - Uset

218
Icc _ i >
(U 2 - Uset )
( Ci × Xi )
10. Using the settings for USet, UDeadband, C (Compensating factor) and Xr2 (transformer
short circuit impedance) calculate the magnitude of Icc_i necessary to cause a tap
change command.
11. Inject current equal to I2Base for Transformer 1 and (I2Base - |Icc_i|) for Transformer 2 so
that the magnitude of calculated circulating current will cause a raise command to be
issued for Transformer 2 and a lower command for Transformer 1. Magnitude and
direction of circulating currents measured for each transformer can be observed as
service values on the local HMI and raise/lower commands detected from the binary
output mapped in the Signal Matrix.
The voltage injection equal to USet is required for both transformers

during this test.
12. Confirm that a tap change command is issued from the voltage control function to
compensate for the circulating current.
13. Injected currents can be reversed such that the direction of calculated circulating
currents change polarity, which will cause a lower command for Transformer 2 and a raise
command for Transformer 1.
Circulating current limit SEMOD175185-841 v6
1. Confirm that OperationPAR is set to CC for each transformer in the parallel group.
2. Confirm that OperCCBlock is set to On for each transformer in the parallel group.
3. Review the setting for CircCurrLimit.
4. Review the setting for CircCurrBk to confirm whether a circulating current limit will result
in an Alarm state, Auto Block or Auto&Man Block of the automatic voltage control for tap
changer, for parallel control function TR8ATCC.
5. Inject a voltage UB equal to USet for each transformer.
6. Inject a load current for Transformer 1 that is equal to rated load current I2Base and a
load current for Transformer 2 that is 1% less than (I2Base – (I2Base · CircCurrLimit))
7. Confirm that the automatic voltage control for tap changer, for parallel control function
TR8ATCC responds in accordance with the setting for CircCurrBk. Alarm and blocking
conditions can be confirmed through interrogation of the event menu or the control
menu on the local HMI.
VTmismatch during parallel operation SEMOD175185-859 v4
1. Confirm that OperationPAR is set to MF for each transformer in the parallel group.
2. Review the setting for VTmismatch and tVTmismatch.
3. Inject a voltage UB equal to USet for Transformer 1 and a voltage less than (USet –
(VTmismatch · USet)) for Transformer 2.
4. This condition should result in a VTmismatch which will mutually block the operation of
the automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control function TR8ATCC for all
transformers connected in the parallel group, which can be confirmed through
interrogation of the local HMI.
5. Confirm that the automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control function
TR8ATCC responds in accordance with the setting for CircCurrBk.
219
purposes.
12.10.4 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD172444-5 v3
For the single command function block, it is necessary to configure the output signal to
corresponding binary output of the IED. The operation of the single command function
(SINGLECMD) is then checked from the local HMI by applying the commands with Mode = Off,
Steady or Pulse, and by observing the logic statuses of the corresponding binary output.
Command control functions included in the operation of different built-in functions must be
tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.
12.10.5 Interlocking M11755-2 v8
Values of the logical signals are available on the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function
status/Control/Apparatus control/Interlocking. The Signal Monitoring in PCM600 shows the
same signals that are available on the local HMI.
The interlocking function consists of a bay-level part and a station-level part. The interlocking
is delivery specific and is realized by bay-to-bay communication over the station bus. For that
reason, test the function in a system, that is, either in a complete delivery system as an
acceptance test (FAT/SAT) or as parts of that system.
12.11 Logic SEMOD53577-1 v1
12.11.1 Tripping logic, common 3-phase output SMPPTRC SEMOD54375-102 v8
This function is functionality tested together with other protection functions (line differential
protection,earth-fault overcurrent protection, and so on) within the IED. It is recommended
that the function is tested together with the autorecloser function, when built into the IED or
when a separate external unit is used for reclosing purposes. The instances of SMPPTRC are
identical except for the name of the function block SMPPTRC. The testing is preferably done in
conjunction with the protection system and autoreclosing function.
12.11.1.1 Three-phase operating mode SEMOD54375-106 v8
1. Check that AutoLock and TripLockout are both set to Off.

2. Initiate a three-phase fault.
An adequate time interval between the faults should be considered, to overcome a
reclaim time caused by the possible activation of the Autorecloser function SMBRREC.
The function must issue a three-phase trip in all cases, when trip is initiated by any
protection or some other built-in or external function. The following functional output
signals must always appear simultaneously: TRIP, TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 and TR3P.
220
12.11.1.2 1ph/3ph operating mode SEMOD54375-116 v4
In addition to various other tests, the following tests should be performed. They depend on
the complete configuration of an IED:
Procedure
1. Make sure that TripLockout and AutoLock are both set to Off.
2. Initiate different single-phase-to-earth faults one at a time.
Single-phase tripping will only be allowed when an autoreclose attempt will follow. The
autorecloser function SMBRREC has the functionality such as the long trip time, CB ready
and so on, which can prevent a proper single-phase tripping and autoreclose. To by-pass
this problem the fault initiation should be with a test set and with the autoreclose in full
service with a test set connected to the distance protection function. Consider using an
adequate time interval between faults, to overcome a reclaim time of which is activated
by SMBRREC. Only a single-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only one
of the trip outputs (TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP and
TR1P should be active during each fault. No other outputs should be active.
3. Initiate different phase-to-phase and three-phase faults.
Consider using an adequate time interval between faults, to overcome a reclaim time,
which is activated by SMBRREC. A three-phase trip should occur for each separate fault
and all of the trips. Functional outputs TRIP, all TRLn and TR3P should be active at each
fault.
No other outputs should be active.
4. Initiate a single phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the trip signal is
issued for the corresponding phase. Initiate the same fault once again within the reclaim
time of the used SMBRREC.
A single-phase fault shall be given at the first fault. A three-phase trip must be initiated
for the second fault. Check that the corresponding trip signals appear after both faults.
Functional outputs TRIP, TRLn and TR1P should be active during first fault. No other
outputs should be active. Functional outputs TRIP, all TRLn and TR3P should be active
during second fault.
issued for the corresponding phase. Initiate the second single phase-to-earth fault in one
of the remaining phases within the time interval, shorter than tEvolvingFault (default
setting 2.0s) and shorter than the dead-time of SMBRREC, when included in the
protection scheme.
Check that the second trip is a three-phase trip and that a three-phase autoreclosing
attempt is given after the three-phase dead time. Functional outputs TRIP, TRLn and
TR1P should be active during the first fault. No other outputs should be active. Functional
outputs TRIP, all TRLn and TR3P should be active during second fault.
12.11.1.3 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode SEMOD54375-143 v4
In addition to other tests, the following tests, which depend on the complete configuration of
an IED, should be carried out.
Procedure
1. Make sure that AutoLock and TripLockout are both set to Off.
2. Initiate different single-phase-to-earth faults one at a time.
Take an adequate time interval between faults into consideration, to overcome a reclaim
time, which is activated by the autorecloser function SMBRREC. Only a single-phase trip
221
should occur for each separate fault and only one of the trip outputs (TRLn) should be
activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP and TR1P should be active at each fault. No
other outputs should be active.
3. Initiate different phase-to-phase faults one at a time.
time which is activated by SMBRREC. Only a two-phase trip should occur for each
separate fault and only corresponding two trip outputs (TRLn) should be activated at a
time. Functional outputs TRIP and TR2P should be active at each fault. No other outputs
should be active.
time, which may be activated by SMBRREC. Only a three-phase trip should occur for the
fault and all trip outputs (TRLn) should be activated at the same time. Functional outputs
TRIP and TR3P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.
issued for the corresponding phase. Initiate the same fault once again within the reclaim
time of the used SMBRREC.
A single-phase fault shall be given at the first fault. A three-phase trip must be initiated
for the second fault. Check that the corresponding trip signals appear after both faults.
Functional outputs TRIP, TRLn and TR1P should be active during first fault. No other
outputs should be active. Functional outputs TRIP, all TRLn and TR3P should be active
during second fault.
generated for the corresponding phase. Initiate the second single-phase-to-earth fault in
one of the remaining phases within the time interval, shorter than tEvolvingFault (default
setting 2.0s) and shorter than the dead-time of SMBRREC, when included in the
protection scheme.
Check that the second trip is a three-phase trip and that a three-phase autoreclosing
attempt is given after the three-phase dead time. Functional outputs TRIP, TRLn and
TR1P should be active during first fault. No other outputs should be active. Functional
outputs TRIP, all TRLn and TR3P should be active during second fault.
7. Initiate a phase-to-phase fault and switch it off immediately when the trip signal is
issued for the corresponding two phases. Initiate a second phase-to-phase fault between
two other phases within the time interval, shorter thantEvolvingFault (default setting
2.0s).
Check, that the output signals, issued for the first fault, correspond to a two- trip for
included phases. The output signals generated by the second fault must correspond to
the three-phase tripping action.
12.11.1.4 Circuit breaker lockout SEMOD54375-170 v10
The following tests should be carried out when the built-in lockout function is used in addition
to possible other tests, which depends on the complete configuration of an IED.
1. Check that AutoLock and TripLockout are both set to Off.

2. Activate shortly the set lockout (SETLKOUT) signal in the IED.
3. Check that the circuit breaker lockout (CLLKOUT) signal is set.
4. Activate shortly thereafter, the reset lockout (RSTLKOUT) signal in the IED.
5. Check that the circuit breaker lockout (CLLKOUT) signal is reset.
A three-phase trip should occur and all trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 should be activated.
Functional outputs TRIP and TR3P should be active at each fault. The output CLLKOUT
should not be set.
7. Activate the automatic lockout function, set AutoLock = On and repeat.
Besides the TRIP outputs, CLLKOUT should be set.
8. Reset the lockout signal by activating the reset lockout (RSTLKOUT) signal.
9. Activate the trip signal lockout function, set TripLockout = On and repeat.
222
All trip outputs (TRL1, TRL2, TRL3) and functional outputs TRIP and TR3P must be active
and stay active after each fault, CLLKOUT should be set.
10. Reset the lockout.
All functional outputs should reset.
11. Deactivate the TRIP signal lockout function, set TripLockout = Off and the automatic
lockout function, set AutoLock = Off.
purposes.
12.11.2 Integrator TIGAPC GUID-D18B2BCA-A79B-4B04-860C-BE2122FECEA7 v2
The integrator function TIGAPC can be tested by connecting a binary signal to the input of the
function and applying pulses to the function. Normally the Integrator will be tested when
testing the function the integrator is connected to, such as reverse power, loss of excitation
and pole slip. When the function is configured, test it together with the function that operates
it.
12.11.2.1 Completing the test GUID-5CD0314D-7D02-477E-BC16-12C82534E72D v2
purposes.
12.12 Monitoring SEMOD53581-1 v1
12.12.1 Gas medium supervision SSIMG GUID-0A83B4D5-51FF-43CB-8DC7-AFCEA2BC7B69 v1
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section "Testing the liquid medium
supervision for alarm and lock out conditions" and section "Completing the test" in this
chapter.
signals PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, TEMP_ALM and TEMP_LO are equal to logical zero.
12.12.1.1 Testing the liquid medium supervision for alarm and lock out conditions GUID-768DAAC8-F89D-4401-B86D-9B26FD7224F6 v1
1. Connect binary inputs to consider gas pressure and gas density to initiate the alarms.
2. Consider the analogue pressure input PRESSURE to initiate the alarms.
3. Gas pressure lock out input can be used to set PRES_LO signal, check the signal status in
local HMI under Main menu/Test/Function status/Monitoring/Gas medium supervision
SSIMG/PRES_LO
4. Reduce the pressure level input below PresAlmLimit, check for PRES_ALM signal status in
local HMI under Main menu/Test/Function status/Monitoring/Gas medium supervision
SSIMG/PRES_ALM
5. Activate BLOCK binary input, the signals PRES_ALM, PRES_LO should disappear.
223
7. Check for reset lock out input RESET_LO to reset PRES_LO lock out signal.
8. Conduct these steps for temperature input as well to detect and reset TEMP_ALM and
TEMP_LO signals.
9. Continue to test another function or end the test by changing the TestMode setting to
off.
12.12.1.2 Completing the test GUID-DD08C598-A35C-4300-9555-A0877F7DC511 v1
purposes.
12.12.2 Liquid medium supervision SSIML GUID-6426FDDA-B949-4FE7-BF42-B52014A9344B v1
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section "Liquid medium supervision
SSIML" and section "Completing the test" in this chapter.
signals LVL_ALM, LVL_LO, TEMP_ALM and TEMP_LO are equal to logical zero.
12.12.2.1 Testing the liquid medium supervision for alarm and lock out conditions GUID-C1F1E6CA-9512-4358-A4E7-84CC3698D156 v1
1. Connect the binary inputs to consider liquid level to initiate the alarms.
2. Consider the analogue level input LEVEL to initiate the alarms.
3. Liquid level lock out input can be used to set LVL_LO signal, check the signal status in
local HMI under Main menu/Test/Function status/Monitoring/Liquid medium
supervision SSIML/LVL_LO
4. Reduce the liquid level input below LevelAlmLimit, check for LVL_ALM signal status in
local HMI under Main menu/Test/Function status/Monitoring/Liquid medium
supervision SSIML/LVL_ALM
5. Activate BLOCK binary input, the signals LVL_ALM, LVL_LO should disappear.
7. Check for reset lock out input RESET_LO to reset the LVL_LO lock out signal.
8. Conduct these steps for temperature input as well to detect and reset TEMP_ALM and
TEMP_LO signals.
9. Continue to test another function or end the test by changing the TestMode setting to
Off.
12.12.2.2 Completing the test GUID-1A0D8AF0-4C48-45E8-B31D-96734ED1A4D2 v1
purposes.
12.12.3 Breaker monitoring SSCBR GUID-10D26C82-79FF-4EAD-AE4A-2F2DBE965087 v2
Prepare the IED for verification of settings outlined in section “Testing the IED operation”.
The Signal Monitoring tool in PCM600 shows the service values that are available on the Local
HMI as well.
Values of the logical signals belong to the breaker monitoring are available on the local HMI
under: Main menu/Test/Function status/Monitoring/BreakerMonitoring/SSCBR:x
224
12.12.3.1 Verifying the settings GUID-962A344D-5F8D-49A6-B3AC-29C7FEED0A3D v4
1. Connect the test set for the injection of a three-phase current to the appropriate current
2. If current need to be injected for a particular test, it should be done in the phase selected
by the PhSel parameter.
3. Follow the sequence for positioning the auxiliary contacts before testing:
POSCLOSE 0 1 0
POSOPEN 0 0 1
4. Test of CB contact travel time
4.1. Test the set timing defined by OpenTimeCorr, CloseTimeCorr, tTrOpenAlm and
tTrCloseAlm.
4.2. Change the status of the auxiliary contacts such that travel time to open TTRVOP
and travel time to close TTRVCL exceed the respective set values (tTrOpenAlm and
tTrCloseAlm). The measured travel time for opening and closing is shown on TTRVOP
and TTRVCL respectively.
4.3. Check that TRVTOPAL and TRVTCLAL are activated.
5. Test of CB status
5.1. Test the set current level defined by AccStopCurr.
5.2. Check the CLOSEPOS output by changing the POSOPEN to 0 and POSCLOSE to 1.
5.3. Check the OPENPOS output by changing the POSOPEN to 1 and POSCLOSE to 0 and
also inject the current in the selected phase slightly lower and higher than
AccStopCurr set value. Only for a current lower than set AccStopCurr should activate
the output POSOPEN.
5.4. Check the circuit breaker is in INVDPOS if auxiliary contacts read same value or CB is
open and inject the current in selected phase more than AccStopCurr set value.
6. Test of remaining life of CB
6.1. Test the set timing defined byRatedOperCurr, RatedFltCurr, OperNoRated,
OperNoFault, DirCoef, CBLifeAlmLevel.
6.2. Vary the phase current in the selected phase from below rated operated current,
RatedOperCurr to above rated fault current, RatedFltCurr of a breaker.
6.3. The remaining life of CB output CBLIFEPH is estimated when the CB is changed from
closed to open position. Check that the output CBLIFEPH is decreased with a value
that corresponds to the injected current.
6.4. CBLIFEAL is activated as soon as CBLIFEPH is below the set CBLifeAlmLevel value.
7. Test of accumulated energy
7.1. Test the actual set values defined by AccSelCal to Aux Contact, ContTrCorr and
AlmAccCurrPwr.
7.2. Inject phase current in the selected phase such that its value is greater than set
AccStopCurr value.
7.3. When the breaker goes to open position, accumulated energy IPOWPH is calculated.
The calculated value can be seen on the output IPOWPH.
7.4. Alarm signal IPOWALPH appears when IPOWPH is greater than set AlmAccCurrPwr
value.
7.5. Lockout signal IPOWLOPH appears if IPOWPH exceeds further to the threshold value
LOAccCurrPwr.
7.6. Calculation of accumulated energy IPOWPH is stopped when injected current is lower
than set AccStopCurr value.
8. Test of CB operation cycles
225
8.1. Test the actual set values defined by OperAlmLevel and OperLOLevel.
8.2. The operation counter, NOOPER is updated for every close-open sequence of the
breaker by changing the position of auxiliary contacts POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
8.3. OPERALM is activated when NOOPER value exceeds the set OperAlmLevel value. The
actual value can be read on the output NOOPER.
8.4. OPERLO is activated when NOOPER value exceeds the set OperLOLevel value.
9. Test of CB spring charge monitoring
9.1. Test the actual set value defined by SpChAlmTime.
9.2. Enable SPRCHRST input. Also activate SPRCHRD after a time greater than set time
SpChAlmTime.
9.3. At this condition, SPCHALM is activated.
10. Test of CB gas pressure indication
10.1. Test the actual set value defined bytDGasPresAlm and tDGasPresLO.
10.2. The output GPRESALM is activated after a time greater than set time of
tDGasPresAlm value if the input PRESALM is enabled.
10.3. The output GPRESLO is activated after a set time of tDGasPresLO value if the input
PRESLO is enabled.
12.12.3.2 Completing the test GUID-0A16206F-690E-46EF-86F4-5A89E0BF640B v3
1. Continue to test another function or end the test by changing the Test mode setting to
Off.
2. Restore connections and settings to their original values if they were changed for testing
purposes.
12.12.4 Event function EVENT M11751-2 v4
During testing, the IED can be set when in test mode from PST. The functionality of the event
reporting during test mode is set in the Parameter Setting tool in PCM600.
• Use event masks

• Report no events
• Report all events
In test mode, individual event blocks can be blocked from PCM600.
12.12.5 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-7EBDC372-3407-4577-8B9A-6AB1758A1F34 v1
The Limit counter function L4UFCNT can be tested by connecting a binary input to the counter
and applying pulses to the counter. The speed of the pulses must not exceed the cycle time of
the function. Normally the counter will be tested when testing the function that the counter is
connected to, such as the trip function. When the function is configured, test it together with
the function that operates it. Trig the function and check that the counter result corresponds
to the number of operations.
226
12.12.5.1 Completing the test GUID-325F040B-BADC-4281-B965-9B7D6BFA3E15 v1
purposes.
12.13 Metering SEMOD53588-1 v1
12.13.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT M13405-2 v7
The test of the Pulse-counter logic function PCFCNT requires the Parameter Setting tool in
PCM600 or an appropriate connection to the local HMI with the necessary functionality. A
known number of pulses with different frequencies are connected to the pulse counter input.
The test should be performed with settings Operation = On or Operation = Off and the
function blocked or unblocked. The pulse counter value is then checked in PCM600 or on the
local HMI.
12.13.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR GUID-4FC03017-93BD-4B30-A874-487BF89971D5 v1
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section ”Overview “ and
section ”Preparing for test“ in this chapter.
12.13.2.1 Verifying the settings GUID-F8F0D384-BC70-48CA-817E-EB9BFBD68A54 v2
Common test equipment can be used to determine the injection of current and voltage and
time measurement.
Verification of EAFACC & ERFACC output
1. Connect the test set for injection of three-phase currents and three phase voltage to the
appropriate current and voltage terminals of the IED.
2. Ensure the instantaneous values of active and reactive power from CVMMXN function
block are connected to ETPMMTR function block active and reactive power inputs.
3. Enable the EnaAcc setting and set tEnergy as 1 minute.
4. Activate the STARTACC input and supply the IED with three phase currents and voltages at
their rated value.
5. Check that the ACCINPRG signal appears continuously.
6. Note the EAFACC and ERFACCvalue after 1 minute and compare it with calculated energy
value.
7. Similarly check after each 1 minute whether the calculated integrated energy value and
EAFACC and ERFACC outputs are matching.
8. After some time (multiple of minute) remove the current and voltage input from CVMMXN
function block.
9. Check the EAFACC and ERFACC output in the next 1 minute cycle for the retaining the same
value.
10. Activate STOPACC input after some time and supply the IED with same current and
voltage.
11. Check that the ACCINPRG signal disappears immediately and EAFACC and ERFACC outputs
also stop updating.
12. Similarly the testing can be done for EAFACC and ERFACC outputs by changing the power
inputs directions through direction settings.
Verification of MAXPAFD & MAXPRFD outputs
227
1. Repeat the above test steps 1 to 2.

2. Set tEnergy setting as 1 minute and supply the IED with three phase currents and voltages
at their rated value till 1 minute.
3. Check the MAXPAFD and MAXPRFD outputs after 1 minute and compare it with last 1 minute
average power values.
4. Increase either three phase current or voltage above the last 1 minute value.
5. After 1 minute check the MAXPAFD and MAXPRFD whether it is showing the last 1 minute
average power value as maximum.
6. Next 1 minute cycle reduce the current or voltage below previous value.
7. Check after 1 minute whether the MAXPAFD and MAXPRFD outputs are retaining the old
maximum value.
8. Similarly the testing can be done for MAXPAFD and MAXPRFD outputs by changing the
power inputs directions through direction settings.
Verification of EAFALM & ERFALM outputs
1. Repeat the above test steps 1 to 2.

2. Set tEnergy setting as 1 minute and supply the IED with three phase currents and voltages
at their rated value till 1 minute.
3. Ensure that the active and reactive energy values are less than the EALim and ERLim
setting default values respectively.
4. Check that EAFALM and ERFALM are low.
5. Increase the supply currents or voltage in next 1 minute cycle such that the active or
reactive energy values are greater than the EALim and ERLim setting default values
respectively.
6. Check that EAFALM and ERFALM are high after 1 minute.
7. Similarly the testing can be done for EARALM and ERRALM outputs by changing the power
inputs directions through direction settings.
purposes.
12.14 Station communication SEMOD53595-1 v1
12.14.1 Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV /

MULTICMDSND SEMOD172432-5 v3
The multiple command and transmit function (MULTICMDRCV / MULTICMDSND) is only

applicable for horizontal communication.
Test of the multiple command function block and multiple transmit is recommended to be
performed in a system, that is, either in a complete delivery system as an acceptance test
(FAT/SAT) or as parts of that system, because the command function blocks are connected in
a delivery-specific way between bays and the station level and transmit.
Command and transmit function blocks included in the operation of different built-in
functions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.
228
12.15 Remote communication SEMOD53601-1 v1
12.15.1 Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive, BinSignTransm M14951-2 v5
Prepare the IED for verification of settings as outlined in section "Preparing the IED to verify
settings".
To perform a test of Binary signal transfer function (BinSignReceive/BinSignTransm), the

hardware (LDCM) and binary input and output signals to transfer must be configured as
required by the application.
There are two types of internal self supervision of BinSignReceive/BinSignTransm
• The I/O-circuit board is supervised as an I/O module. For example it generates FAIL if the
board is not inserted. I/O-modules not configured are not supervised.
• The communication is supervised and the signal COMFAIL is generated if a
communication error is detected.
Status for inputs and outputs as well as self-supervision status are available from the local
HMI under
• Self-supervision status: Main menu/Diagnostics/Internal events

• Status for inputs and outputs: Main menu/Test/Function status, browse to the function
group of interest.
• Remote communication related signals: Main menu/Test/Function status/
Communication/Remote communication
Test the correct functionality by simulating different kind of faults. Also check that sent and
received data is correctly transmitted and read.
A test connection is shown in figure 68. A binary input signal (BI) at End1 is configured to be
transferred through the communication link to End2. At End2 the received signal is configured
to control a binary output (BO). Check at End2 that the BI signal is received and the BO
operates.
Repeat the test for all the signals configured to be transmitted over the communication link.
229
Figure 68: Test of RTC with I/O
12.16 Basic IED functions SEMOD52026-1 v1
12.16.1 Parameter setting group handling SETGRPS M11369-2 v3
1. Check the configuration of binary inputs that control the selection of the active setting
group.
2. Browse to the ActiveGroup menu to achieve information about the active setting group.
The ActiveGroup menu is located on the local HMI underMain menu/Test/Function
status/Setting groups/ActiveGroup
3. Connect the appropriate dc voltage to the corresponding binary input of the IED and
observe the information presented on the local HMI.
The displayed information must always correspond to the activated input.
4. Check that the corresponding output indicates the active group.
Operating procedures for the PC aided methods of changing the active setting groups
are described in the corresponding PCM600 documents and instructions for the
operators within the SCS are included in the SCS documentation.
purposes.
230
12.17 Exit test mode SEMOD53244-3 v4
The following procedure is used to return to normal operation.
1. Navigate to the test mode folder.

2. Change the On setting to Off. Press the 'E' key and the left arrow key.
3. Answer YES, press the 'E' key and exit the menus.
231
232
Checking the directionality
Section 13 Checking the directionality
13.1 Overview GUID-7E504488-F341-477A-953A-EB0B262911EB v2
Before starting this process, all individual devices that are involved in the fault clearance
process of the protected object must have been individually tested and must be set in
operation. The circuit breaker must be ready for an open-close-open cycle.
The directional test is performed when the protected object is energized and a certain amount
of load current is available. It is also necessary to know the flow of the load current (import or
export, i.e. forward or reverse) by help of the indication from an external instrument (energy-
meter, or SCADA information).
The design of the test procedure depends on the type of protection function to be tested.
Some items that can be used as guidelines are the following.
13.2 Testing the directionality of the distance protection GUID-EB5380B2-6086-4814-8890-102E55A79C82 v4
The test is performed by looking at the information given by the High speed distance
protection ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS or the directional function ZDRDIR or ZDMRDIR whichever is
used.
Procedure:
1. Make sure that all control and protection functions that belong to the object that are
going to be energized have been tested and are set to be in operation
2. Make sure that the primary load current fulfills the following conditions (by using an
external equipment):
• The magnitude of the primary load current must be higher than the minimum
operating current set for the directional elements in the IED. In case of default
settings this means:
• load current > 5% of base current
• Otherwise the settings IMinOpPE and IMinOpPP for ZDRDIR or ZDMRDIR are
available under the HMI menu: Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/
Impedance protection/DirectionalImpedance
The primary load impedance must have an angle (PHI) between the setting angles for the
directional lines. In case of default settings this means:
• for forward (exported) load: -15 deg < PHI < 115 deg
• for reverse (imported) load: 165 deg < PHI < 295 deg
The settings for forward load: - ArgDir < PHI < ArgNegRes and the settings for reverse
load: 180 deg - ArgDir < PHI < 180 deg + ArgNegRes included in the directional functions
ZDRDIR or ZDMRDIR are available under the HMI menu:
• Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Impedance protection/DirectionalImpedance
3. The directionality of the load current is shown by the High speed distance protection
ZMFPDIS or ZMFCPDIS under the HMI menu: Main menu/Test/Function status/
Impedance protection/HighSpeedDistance or by the directional function ZDRDIR or
ZDMRDIR and it is available under the HMI menu: Main menu/Test/Function status/
Impedance protection/DirectionalImpedance
The following will be shown if the load current flows in forward (exporting) direction:
233
Checking the directionality
• L1Dir = Forward
• L2Dir = Forward
• L3Dir = Forward
The following will be shown if the load current flows in the reverse direction (importing):
• L1Dir = Reverse
• L2Dir = Reverse
• L3Dir = Reverse
Compare this result with the information given by the external equipment, it must be the
same. If the direction of the three phases is not the same, this is a sign of incorrect
connection of the voltage or current transformers serving the distance protection
function. It is also possible that there is a wrong setting for the earthing point for one or
more of the CTs serving distance protection (the setting name is: CTStarPoint available
under the HMI menu:Main menu/Configuration/Analog modules).
If the directional function shows forward when it should show reverse (or vice-versa) for
all the three phases, this probably means a wrong connection of CTs and/or VTs serving
the distance protection, or it can mean a wrong setting of earthing point (the setting
name is : CTStarPoint) for all the three CTs, or it could mean a wrong setting for the pre-
processing blocks (3PhaseAnalogGroup under the HMI menu: Main menu/Configuration/
Analog modules) connected to the CTs/VTs and serving the distance protection (verify
that no wrong negation has been set; the setting name is: Negation).
If the directional function shows “No direction” for all the three phases it can mean that
the load current is below the minimum operating current or that the load impedance has
an angle which is outside the above given valid angles for determining forward or reverse
direction.
If the directional function shows “No direction” for only some of the three phases, this
probably means a wrong CTs/VTs connection.
4. The measured impedance information is available under the same menu. These values are
not affected by the minimum operating current setting of ZDRDIR or ZDMRDIR and the
measured values are shown any time the load current is higher than 3% of the base
current:
• L1R
• L1X
• L2R
• L2X
• L3R
• L3X
The measured impedance information can still be used to determine the direction of the
load. A positive resistance measured in all phases indicates a forward (exporting) resistive
load (active power), while a negative sign indicates a reverse (importing) resistive load
(active power). Usually it is enough to look at the resistive values to get information of the
load direction, that must anyway be compared with the indication given by external
equipment measuring the same power flow.
234
Commissioning and maintenance of the fault clearing system
Section 14 Commissioning and maintenance of

the fault clearing system
14.1 Commissioning tests SEMOD56513-5 v4
During commissioning all protection functions shall be verified with the setting values used at
each plant. The commissioning tests must include verification of all circuits by green-lining the
circuit diagrams and the configuration diagrams for the used functions.
Further, the settings for protection functions are tested and recorded carefully as outlined for
the future periodic maintenance tests.
The final testing includes primary verification of all directional functions where load currents is
checked on the local HMI and in PCM600. The amplitudes and angles of all currents and
voltages should be checked and the symmetry verified.
Directional functions have information about the measured direction and, for example,
measured impedance. These values must be checked and verified as correct with the export or
import of power available.
Finally, final trip tests must be performed. This involves activation of protection functions or
tripping outputs with the circuit breaker closed and the tripping of the breaker verified. When
several breakers are involved, each breaker must be checked individually and it must be
verified that the other involved breakers are not tripped at the same time.
14.2 Periodic maintenance tests SEMOD56517-1 v1
SEMOD56520-5 v4
The periodicity of all tests depends on several factors, for example the importance of the
installation, environmental conditions, simple or complex equipment, static or
electromechanical IEDs, and so on.
The normal maintenance praxis of the user should be followed. However, ABB's
recommendation is as follows:
Every second to third year
• Visual inspection of all equipment.

• Removal of dust on ventilation louvres and IEDs if necessary.
• Periodic maintenance test for protection IEDs of object where no redundant protections
are provided.
Every four to six years
• Periodic maintenance test for protection IEDs of objects with redundant protection
system.
First maintenance test should always be carried out after the first half year of
service.
235
When protection IEDs are combined with built-in control, the test interval can
be increased drastically, up to for instance 15 years, because the IED
continuously reads service values, operates the breakers, and so on.
14.2.1 Visual inspection SEMOD56525-5 v3
Prior to testing, the protection IEDs should be inspected to detect any visible damage that
may have occurred (for example, dirt or moisture deposits, overheating).
Make sure that all IEDs are equipped with covers.
14.2.2 Maintenance tests SEMOD56534-1 v1
SEMOD56528-5 v5
To be made after the first half year of service, then with the cycle as proposed above and after
any suspected maloperation or change of the IED setting.
Testing of protection IEDs shall preferably be made with the primary circuit de-energized. The
IED cannot protect the circuit during testing. Trained personnel may test one IED at a time on
live circuits where redundant protection is installed and de-energization of the primary circuit
is not allowed.
ABB protection IEDs are preferably tested by aid of components from the COMBITEST testing
system described in information B03-9510 E. Main components are RTXP 8/18/24 test switch
usually located to the left in each protection IED and RTXH 8/18/24 test handle, which is
inserted in test switch at secondary testing. All necessary operations such as opening of trip
circuits, short-circuiting of current circuits and opening of voltage circuits are automatically
performed in the right order to allow for simple and safe secondary testing even with the
object in service.
14.2.2.1 Preparation SEMOD56528-10 v2
Before starting maintenance testing, the test engineers should scrutinize applicable circuit
diagrams and have the following documentation available:
• Test instructions for protection IEDs to be tested

• Test records from previous commissioning and maintenance tests
• List of valid settings
• Blank test records to fill in measured values
14.2.2.2 Recording SEMOD56528-14 v2
It is of utmost importance to carefully record the test results. Special test sheets covering the
frequency of test, date of test and achieved test values should be used. IED setting list and
protocols from previous tests should be available and all results should be compared for
differences. At component failures, spare equipment is used and set to the requested value. A
note of the exchange is made and the new measured values are recorded. Test records for
several years of testing should be stored in a common file for a station, or a part of a station,
to give a simple overview of the period of testing and achieved test values. These test records
are valuable when analysis of service disturbances shall be done.
14.2.2.3 Secondary injection SEMOD56528-17 v2
The periodic maintenance test is done by secondary injection from a portable test set. Each
protection shall be tested according to the secondary injection test information for the
236
specific protection IED. Only the setting values adopted shall be checked for each protection
function. If the discrepancy between obtained value and requested set value is too big the
setting should be adjusted, the new value recorded and a note should be made in the test
record.
14.2.2.4 Alarm test SEMOD56528-20 v4
When inserting the test handle the alarm and event signalling is normally blocked. This is done
in the IED by setting the event reporting to Off during the test. This can be done when the test
handle is inserted or the IED is set to test mode from the local HMI. At the end of the
secondary injection test it should be checked that the event and alarm signalling is correct by
activating the events and performing some selected tests.
14.2.2.5 Self supervision check SEMOD56528-23 v4
Once secondary testing has been completed, it should be checked that no self-supervision
signals are activated continuously or sporadically. Especially check the time synchronization
system, GPS or other, and communication signals, both station communication and remote
communication.
14.2.2.6 Trip circuit check SEMOD56528-26 v5
When the protection IED undergoes an operational check, a tripping pulse is normally obtained
on one or more of the output contacts and preferably on the test switch. The healthy circuit is
of utmost importance for the protection operation. If the circuit is not provided with a
continuous trip-circuit supervision, it is possible to check that circuit is really closed when the
test-plug handle has been removed by using a high-ohmic voltmeter and measuring between
the plus and the trip output on the panel. The measurement is then done through the trip coil
of the circuit breaker and therefore the complete trip circuit is checked.
Note that the breaker must be closed.
Please observe that the test system does not provide built-in security during
this test. If the instrument should be set on Amp instead of Volts, the circuit
breaker naturally is tripped, therefore, great care is necessary.
Trip circuit from trip IEDs to circuit breaker is often supervised by trip-circuit supervision. It
can then be checked that a circuit is healthy by opening tripping output terminals in the
cubicle. When the terminal is opened, an alarm shall be achieved on the signal system after a
delay of some seconds.
Remember to close the circuit directly after the test and tighten the terminal
carefully.
14.2.2.7 Measurement of service currents SEMOD56528-30 v4
After a maintenance test it is recommended to measure the service currents and service
voltages recorded by the protection IED. The service values are checked on the local HMI or in
PCM600. Ensure that the correct values and angles between voltages and currents are
237
recorded. Also check the direction of directional functions such as Distance and directional
overcurrent functions.
For transformer differential protection, the achieved differential current value is dependent on
the tap changer position and can vary between less than 1% up to perhaps 10% of rated
current. For line differential functions, the capacitive charging currents can normally be
recorded as a differential current.
The zero-sequence current to earth-fault protection IEDs should be measured. The current
amounts normally very small but normally it is possible to see if the current circuit is "alive".
The neutral-point voltage to an earth-fault protection IED is checked. The voltage is normally
0.1 to 1V secondary. However, voltage can be considerably higher due to harmonics. Normally a
CVT secondary can have around 2.5 - 3% third-harmonic voltage.
14.2.2.8 Restoring SEMOD56528-36 v2
Maintenance is very important to improve the availability of the protection system by

detecting failures before the protection is required to operate. There is however little point in
testing healthy equipment and then putting it back into service with an open terminal, with a
removed fuse or open miniature circuit breaker with an open connection, wrong setting, and
so on.
Thus a list should be prepared of all items disturbed during test so that all can be put back into
service quickly and without overlooking something. It should be put back into service item by
item and signed by the responsible engineer.
238
Troubleshooting
Section 15 Troubleshooting
15.1 Checking the self supervision signals IP1474-1 v1
15.1.1 Checking the self supervision function IP1473-1 v1
15.1.1.1 Determine the cause of an internal failure M11657-2 v1
This procedure describes how to navigate the menus in order to find the cause of an internal
failure when indicated by the flashing green LED on the HMI module.
Procedure
1. Display the general diagnostics menu.

Navigate the menus to:
Diagnostics/IED status/General
2. Scroll the supervision values to identify the reason for the failure.
Use the arrow buttons to scroll between values.
15.1.2 Self supervision HMI data IP1472-1 v1
15.1.2.1 General IED status GUID-A84F3903-8A70-47D6-8613-AD7FF8BA3AEC v1
The following table shows the general IED status signals.

M11656-1 v2
Table 34: Signals from the General menu in the diagnostics tree.
Indicated result Possible reason Proposed action
Internal fail Off No problem detected. None.
Internal fail On A failure has occurred. Check the rest of the indicated results to find the fault.
Internal warning Off No problem detected. None.
Internal warning On A warning has been Check the rest of the indicated results to find the fault.
issued.
Time synch Ready No problem detected. None.
Time synch Fail No time Check the synchronization source for problems.
synchronization. If the problem persists, contact your ABB representative
for service.
Real time clock Ready No problem detected. None.
Real time clock Fail The real time clock has Set the clock.
been reset.
ADC-module OK No problem detected. None.
ADC-module Fail The AD conversion Contact your ABB representative for service.
module has failed.
(Protocol name) Ready No problem detected. None.
239
Troubleshooting
Indicated result Possible reason Proposed action

(Protocol name) Fail Protocol has failed.
(I/O module name) No problem detected. None.
Ready
(I/O module name) I/O modules has failed. Check that the I/O module has been configured and
Fail connected to the IOP1- block.
If the problem persists, contact your ABB representative
for service.
15.2 Fault tracing IP8765-1 v1
15.2.1 Internal fault indications M11763-2 v7
If an internal fault has occurred, the local HMI displays information under Main menu/
Diagnostics/IED status/General
Under the Diagnostics menus, indications of a possible internal failure (serious fault) or
internal warning (minor problem) are listed.
Indications regarding the faulty unit are outlined in table 35.
Table 35: Self-supervision signals on the local HMI

HMI Signal Name: Status Description
INT Fail OFF / ON This signal will be active if one or
more of the following internal signals
are active; INT--LMDERROR, INT--
WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--
RTEERROR, or any of the HW
dependent signals
INT Warning OFF / ON This signal will be active if one or
more of the following internal signals
are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--
IEC61850ERROR, INT--
TIMESYNCHERROR
ADMnn READY / FAIL Analog input module n failed. Signal
activation will reset the IED
BIMnn READY / FAIL BIM error. Binary input module Error
status. Signal activation will reset the
IED
BOMn READY / FAIL BOM error. Binary output module
Error status.
IOMn READY / FAIL IOM-error. Input/Output Module Error
status.
MIMn READY / FAIL mA input module MIM1 failed. Signal
activation will reset the IED
RTC READY / FAIL This signal will be active when there is
a hardware error with the real time
clock.
Time Sync READY / FAIL This signal will be active when the
source of the time synchronization is
lost, or when the time system has to
make a time reset.
240
Troubleshooting
HMI Signal Name: Status Description

Application READY / FAIL This signal will be active if one or
more of the application threads are
not in the state that Runtime Engine
expects. The states can be CREATED,
INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc.
RTE READY / FAIL This signal will be active if the
Runtime Engine failed to do some
actions with the application threads.
The actions can be loading of settings
or parameters for components,
changing of setting groups, loading or
unloading of application threads.
IEC61850 READY / FAIL This signal will be active if the IEC
61850 stack did not succeed in some
actions like reading IEC 61850
configuration, startup etc.
LMD READY / FAIL LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in
an unrecoverable error state.
LDCMxxx READY / FAIL Line Differential Communication Error
status
OEM READY / FAIL Optical Ethernet Module error status
Also the internal signals, such as INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING can be connected to binary
output contacts for signalling to a control room.
In the IED Status - Information, the present information from the self-supervision function can
be viewed. Indications of failure or warnings for each hardware module are provided, as well as
information about the external time synchronization and the internal clock. All according to
table 35. Loss of time synchronization can be considered as a warning only. The IED has full
functionality without time synchronization.
When settings are changed in the IED, the protection and control applications restart in order
to take effect of the changes. During restart, internal events get generated and Runtime App
error will be displayed. These events are only indications and will be for short duration during
the restart.
IED will not be operational during applications restart.
15.2.2 Using front-connected PC M11763-203 v4
When an internal fault has occurred, extensive information about the fault can be retrieved
from the list of internal events available in the SMS part:
TRM-STAT TermStatus - Internal Events
The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.
The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1ms and stored in a list. The list can
store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, when it is full, the oldest event is
overwritten. The list cannot be cleared and its content cannot be erased.
241
Troubleshooting
The internal events in this list not only refer to faults in the IED, but also to other activities,
such as change of settings, clearing of disturbance reports, and loss of external time
synchronization.
The information can only be retrieved from the Parameter Setting software package. The PC
can be connected either to the port at the front or at the rear of the IED.
These events are logged as internal events.
Table 36: Events available for the internal event list in the IED
Event message: Description Generating signal:
INT--FAIL Off Internal fail status INT--FAIL (reset event)
INT--FAIL INT--FAIL (set event)
INT--WARNING Off Internal warning status lNT--WARNING (reset event)
INT--WARNING lNT--WARNING (set event)
IOn--Error Off In/Out module No. n status IOn--Error (reset event)
IOn--Error IOn--Error (set event)
ADMn-Error Off Analog/Digital module No. n ADMn-Error (reset event)
status
ADMn-Error ADMn-Error (set event)
MIM1-Error Off mA-input module status MIM1-Error (reset event)
MIM1-Error MIM1-Error (set event)
INT--RTC Off Real Time Clock (RTC) status INT--RTC (reset event)
INT--RTC INT--RTC (set event)
INT--TSYNC Off External time synchronization INT--TSYNC (reset event)
status
INT--TSYNC INT--TSYNC (set event)
INT--SETCHGD Any settings in IED changed
DRPC-CLEARED All disturbances in
Disturbance report cleared
The events in the internal event list are time tagged with a resolution of 1ms.
This means that, when using the PC for fault tracing, it provides information on the:
• Module that should be changed.

• Sequence of faults, if more than one unit is faulty.
• Exact time when the fault occurred.
15.2.3 Diagnosing the IED status via the LHMI hint menu GUID-7E8503E9-441B-487A-9CD7-B43463D1CAE5 v3
In order to help the user, there is an LHMI page labeled ‘Hints’. This page is located under Main
menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Hints. For each activated hint there is a headline. From the
headline view, an explanation page can be entered, giving the user more information and hints
about the particular topic.
For example, if there is a configuration to use IEC 61850 9–2 analog data, but no data arrives
on the access point, then the IED will use substituted data and most protection functions will
be blocked. This condition will be indicated with a sub-menu under Hints, where details about
this condition are shown. The Hint menu is a way to assist the user in troubleshooting.
242
Troubleshooting
The Hint menu is currently only available in English. All the entries are in English,
regardless of which language is selected.
The supported list of hints are as follows:
Table 37: Hint menu

Headline Explanation
Incorrect setting of SyncLostMode There are two explanations possible:
SyncLostMode is set to Block, no time source is

configured to achieve the required accuracy. Unless a
high accuracy time source is selected, the function
dependent on high time accuracy will be blocked.
SyncLostMode is set to BlockOnLostUTC, but there is
no UTC capable synch source (GPS, IRIG-B) used.
Unless a UTC capable time source is selected, the
function dependent on high time accuracy will be
blocked.
Sampled value substituted <Access Point><Hardware Module Identifier><svID>
Where the Hardware Module Identifier is the same as
given in PCM600, e.g. AP1: MU1_9201 svID:
<ABB_MU0101>
Time diff: IED vs Sampled value <Access Point><Hardware Module Identifier><svID>
<ABB_MU0101>
Frequency diff: IED vs Sampled value <Access Point><Hardware Module Identifier><svID>
<ABB_MU0101>
Wrong cycle time for PMU report Wrong cycle time on SMAI or 3PHSUM block
connected to Phasor Report block. The SMAI or
3PHSUM block should have the same cycle time as
that of Phasor Report.
PMU not connected to 3ph output The PMU phasor report input(s) must be connected
to the 3ph output of SMAI or 3PHSU.
Invalid value set for PMU Parameters There are two explanations possible:
Check if the following parameters are set correctly on

PMUREPORT: ReportRate or SvcClass or parameter
PRIMVAL:1.FrequencySel is not set as 50Hz / 60Hz.
Check if the following parameters are set correctly on
PMUREPORT: ReportRate or SvcClass or RptTimetag
or parameter PRIMVAL:1.FrequencySel is not set as
50Hz / 60Hz.
Invalid phase angle reference The selected PhaseAngleRef corresponds to an
analog channel that is not configured. Please
configure a valid reference channel.
GOOSE is configured on a disabled port At least one of the access points configured for
GOOSE is disabled. The port can be disabled either
through changing the access point operation to off
or by unchecking the GOOSE protocol from the
access point in the Ethernet configuration in PCM600
or LHMI.
Please enable GOOSE on access points: AP_FRONT,
AP_1
243
Troubleshooting
Headline Explanation
LDCM not running the application image <slot number> is running the factory image instead
of the application image. The factory image is older
and does not contain the latest updates and fixes.
Please reboot the IED. If the problem persists update
the LDCM firmware or replace the board.
LDCM version is not accepted <device name> firmware version <version string> is
not accepted. The minimum accepted version is
<version string>.
Please update the LDCM firmware or replace the
board.
OEM not running the application image OEM in slot <slot number> is running the factory
image instead of the application image. The factory
image is older and does not contain the latest
updates and fixes.
Please reboot the IED. If the problem persists, update
the OEM firmware or replace the board.
SFP unplugged from the slot SFP has been unplugged from the slot
Please check the connection.
Corresponding hardware(s) is set to fail.
SFP replaced with other type Configured and the detected SFP(s) are different.
Corresponding hardware(s) is set to fail.
Please restart IED and consider Reconfigure HW
modules to get updated hardware list.
Non ABB vendor SFP detected Non ABB vendor SFP detected.
Corresponding hardware(s) is set to fail. Please use
ABB approved SFP’s.
15.2.4 Hardware re-configuration GUID-334C5D8B-F383-4CDE-9850-659ED6B405DC v1
When adding, removing or moving a hardware modules in an IED ( for example, I/O modules,
communication modules or time synchronization modules) a set of procedures must be
followed.
Adding a new module in to an IED
Procedure:
1. Switch the IED off and insert the new module.

2. Switch the IED on, wait for it to start, and then perform a HW reconfig.
3. Perform a license update in PCM600.
The new module is now available in PCM600 and is ready to be configured.
Removing a module from an IED
Procedure:
1. Remove all existing configuration for the module in PCM, and write that configuration to
the IED.
2. Switch the IED off and remove the HW module.
4. Perform a license update in PCM 600.
244
Troubleshooting
If any configuration that makes the module needed remains, then the HW
reconfig will not remove the module.
The module will still be needed. An error indication for the module will appear, if
the module is physically removed from the IED and the IED is restarted with
some part of the configuration still requiring the module.
Moving a module in an IED from one position to another
Procedure:
1. Remove all existing configuration for the module in PCM, and write that configuration to
the IED.
2. Switch the IED off and move the HW module.
4. Perform a license update in PCM600.
The new module is now available in PCM600 at the new position and is ready to be configured.
15.3 Repair instruction IP8767-1 v1
M11764-2 v2
Never disconnect the secondary connection of a current transformer circuit

without short-circuiting the transformer’s secondary winding. Operating a
potential build up that may damage the transformer and may cause injuries to
humans.
Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a IED during

normal service. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be
lethal. Operation may be disrupted and IED and measuring circuitry may be
damaged.
M11764-10 v1
An alternative is to open the IED and send only the faulty circuit board to ABB for repair. When
a printed circuit board is sent to ABB, it must always be placed in a metallic, ESD-proof,
protection bag. The user can also purchase separate replacement modules.
Strictly follow the company and country safety regulations.
M11766-4 v2
Most electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge and latent damage may
occur. Please observe usual procedures for handling electronics and also use an ESD wrist
strap. A semi-conducting layer must be placed on the workbench and connected to earth.
Disassemble and reassemble the IED accordingly:
1. Switch off the dc supply.

2. Short-circuit the current transformers and disconnect all current and voltage connections
from the IED.
3. Disconnect all signal wires by removing the female connectors.
4. Disconnect the optical fibers.
5. Unscrew the main back plate of the IED.
6. If the transformer module is to be changed:
245
Troubleshooting
• Remove the IED from the panel if necessary.

• Remove the rear plate of the IED.
• Remove the front plate.
• Remove the screws of the transformer input module, both front and rear.
7. Pull out the faulty module.
8. Check that the new module has a correct identity number.
9. Check that the springs on the card rail are connected to the corresponding metallic area
on the circuit board when the new module is inserted.
10. Reassemble the IED.
If the IED has been calibrated with the system inputs, the calibration procedure must be
performed again to maintain the total system accuracy.
15.4 Repair support M11768-3 v3
If an IED needs to be repaired, the whole IED must be removed and sent to an ABB Logistic
Center. Before returning the material, an inquiry must be sent to the ABB Logistic Center.
e-mail: [email protected]
15.5 Maintenance M11769-3 v2
The IED is self-supervised. No special maintenance is required.
Instructions from the power network company and other maintenance directives valid for
maintenance of the power system must be followed.
246
Glossary
Section 16 Glossary M14893-1 v18
AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fiber optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A
United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International
Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
247
Glossary
CO cycle Close-open cycle

Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted
pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for
Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC
60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted
pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions
and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the
TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
ECT Ethernet configuration tool
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
248
Glossary
EMI Electromagnetic interference

EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fiber connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and
protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven
duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FPN Flexible product naming
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local
telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and
unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HLV circuit Hazardous Live Voltage according to IEC60255-27
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
ICT Installation and Commissioning Tool for injection based protection in
REG670
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for
protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
249
Glossary
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-
pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References
the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card)
standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG
(Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber
Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
IET600 Integrated engineering tool
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,
they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a
function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different
number in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes
defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In
the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a
type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite
widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort
packet-switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation
and reassembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line data communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
250
Glossary
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed

for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance
presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the
fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PELV circuit Protected Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PTP Precision time protocol
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-
to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
251
Glossary
SC Switch or push button to close

SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SELV circuit Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
SFP Small form-factor pluggable (abbreviation)
Optical Ethernet port (explanation)
SLM Serial communication module.

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks
on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate
hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each
embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock,
providing the required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave protocol
for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer
protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto
standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP
was developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both
network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify
two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer
to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon
these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a
BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
252
Glossary
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and voltages

taken from the process into levels suitable for further signal
processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance
presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not
“see” the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by
the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the
basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time
signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the
addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with
Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's
irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal
Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian
calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also
sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the
phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the residual or
the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
253
254
255
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
www.abb.com/substationautomation
1MRK 502 067-UEN
© Copyright 2016 ABB.

All rights reserved.

Commissioning Manual Generator Protection REG670 2.1 IEC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Commissioning Manual Generator Protection REG670 2.1 IEC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Commissioning Manual Generator Protection REG670 2.1 IEC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

—

Generator protection REG670

© Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved

Section 2 Safety information........................................................................................... 23

Section 3 Available functions........................................................................................... 27

Section 4 Starting up.........................................................................................................39

4.12 Checking optical connections....................................................................................................... 48

Section 5 Configuring the IED and changing settings..................................................49

Section 6 Calibrating injection based sensitive rotor earth fault protection........... 51

Section 7 Calibrating injection based 100% stator earth fault protection............... 63

Section 8 Establishing connection and verifying the SPA/IEC communication........75

Section 9 Establishing connection and verifying the LON communication............... 79

Section 10 Establishing connection and verifying the IEC 61850 communication..... 83

10.2 Setting the station communication.............................................................................................83

Section 11 Testing IED operation...................................................................................... 85

Section 12 Testing functionality by secondary injection............................................... 97

12.4.1 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS.................................102

12.5.9.6 Verifying instantaneous back-up trip at CB faulty condition........................................167

12.6.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ....................................................................... 184

12.9.1.1 Verifying the settings............................................................................................................199

12.12.2.2 Completing the test.............................................................................................................. 224

Section 13 Checking the directionality........................................................................... 233

Section 14 Commissioning and maintenance of the fault clearing system............... 235

Section 15 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 239

15.2.1 Internal fault indications......................................................................................................... 240

Section 16 Glossary........................................................................................................... 247

1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v19

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v10

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v15

Deinstalling & disposal

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v2.1.1

Document revision/date History

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v4

Documents related to REG670 Document numbers

670 series manuals Document numbers

670 series manuals Document numbers

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v12

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v8

1.5 IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v2

Table 1: IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

Section 2 Safety information

2.1 Symbols on the product GUID-E48F2EC3-6AB8-4ECF-A77E-F16CE45CA5FD v2

All warnings must be observed.

2.2 Warnings IP1504-1 v2

National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed.

Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a IED during

Always connect the IED to protective earth, regardless of the operating

Never disconnect the secondary connection of current transformer circuit

The IED with accessories should be mounted in a cubicle in a restricted access